|
|
This is ld.info, produced by makeinfo version 6.7 from ld.texi.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This file documents the GNU linker LD (GNU Binutils) version 2.34.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Copyright (C) 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
|
|
|
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
|
|
|
any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
|
|
|
Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no Back-Cover
|
|
|
Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled "GNU
|
|
|
Free Documentation License".
|
|
|
INFO-DIR-SECTION Software development
|
|
|
START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
|
|
|
* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
|
|
|
END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Top, Next: Overview, Up: (dir)
|
|
|
|
|
|
LD
|
|
|
**
|
|
|
|
|
|
This file documents the GNU linker ld (GNU Binutils) version 2.34.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
|
|
|
Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included in
|
|
|
the section entitled "GNU Free Documentation License".
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Menu:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Overview:: Overview
|
|
|
* Invocation:: Invocation
|
|
|
* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
|
|
|
* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
|
|
|
* BFD:: BFD
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
|
|
|
* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
|
|
|
* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
|
|
|
* LD Index:: LD Index
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Overview, Next: Invocation, Prev: Top, Up: Top
|
|
|
|
|
|
1 Overview
|
|
|
**********
|
|
|
|
|
|
'ld' combines a number of object and archive files, relocates their data
|
|
|
and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in compiling a
|
|
|
program is to run 'ld'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'ld' accepts Linker Command Language files written in a superset of
|
|
|
AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax, to provide explicit and
|
|
|
total control over the linking process.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This version of 'ld' uses the general purpose BFD libraries to
|
|
|
operate on object files. This allows 'ld' to read, combine, and write
|
|
|
object files in many different formats--for example, COFF or 'a.out'.
|
|
|
Different formats may be linked together to produce any available kind
|
|
|
of object file. *Note BFD::, for more information.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Aside from its flexibility, the GNU linker is more helpful than other
|
|
|
linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
|
|
|
execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
|
|
|
'ld' continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors (or, in
|
|
|
some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Invocation, Next: Scripts, Prev: Overview, Up: Top
|
|
|
|
|
|
2 Invocation
|
|
|
************
|
|
|
|
|
|
The GNU linker 'ld' is meant to cover a broad range of situations, and
|
|
|
to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result, you
|
|
|
have many choices to control its behavior.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Menu:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Options:: Command-line Options
|
|
|
* Environment:: Environment Variables
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Options, Next: Environment, Up: Invocation
|
|
|
|
|
|
2.1 Command-line Options
|
|
|
========================
|
|
|
|
|
|
The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
|
|
|
practice few of them are used in any particular context. For instance,
|
|
|
a frequent use of 'ld' is to link standard Unix object files on a
|
|
|
standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to link a file
|
|
|
'hello.o':
|
|
|
|
|
|
ld -o OUTPUT /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
|
|
|
|
|
|
This tells 'ld' to produce a file called OUTPUT as the result of
|
|
|
linking the file '/lib/crt0.o' with 'hello.o' and the library 'libc.a',
|
|
|
which will come from the standard search directories. (See the
|
|
|
discussion of the '-l' option below.)
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some of the command-line options to 'ld' may be specified at any
|
|
|
point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
|
|
|
as '-l' or '-T', cause the file to be read at the point at which the
|
|
|
option appears in the command line, relative to the object files and
|
|
|
other file options. Repeating non-file options with a different
|
|
|
argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
|
|
|
occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
|
|
|
option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
|
|
|
noted in the descriptions below.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be
|
|
|
linked together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with
|
|
|
command-line options, except that an object file argument may not be
|
|
|
placed between an option and its argument.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you
|
|
|
can specify other forms of binary input files using '-l', '-R', and the
|
|
|
script command language. If _no_ binary input files at all are
|
|
|
specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
|
|
|
message 'No input files'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
|
|
|
assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
|
|
|
augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
|
|
|
linker script or the one specified by using '-T'). This feature permits
|
|
|
the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object or an
|
|
|
archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses 'INPUT'
|
|
|
or 'GROUP' to load other objects. Specifying a script in this way
|
|
|
merely augments the main linker script, with the extra commands placed
|
|
|
after the main script; use the '-T' option to replace the default linker
|
|
|
script entirely, but note the effect of the 'INSERT' command. *Note
|
|
|
Scripts::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
For options whose names are a single letter, option arguments must
|
|
|
either follow the option letter without intervening whitespace, or be
|
|
|
given as separate arguments immediately following the option that
|
|
|
requires them.
|
|
|
|
|
|
For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two
|
|
|
can precede the option name; for example, '-trace-symbol' and
|
|
|
'--trace-symbol' are equivalent. Note--there is one exception to this
|
|
|
rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can only
|
|
|
be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the '-o'
|
|
|
option. So for example '-omagic' sets the output file name to 'magic'
|
|
|
whereas '--omagic' sets the NMAGIC flag on the output.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from
|
|
|
the option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
|
|
|
immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
|
|
|
'--trace-symbol foo' and '--trace-symbol=foo' are equivalent. Unique
|
|
|
abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are accepted.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note--if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler
|
|
|
driver (e.g. 'gcc') then all the linker command-line options should be
|
|
|
prefixed by '-Wl,' (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
|
|
|
compiler driver) like this:
|
|
|
|
|
|
gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
|
|
|
|
|
|
This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
|
|
|
silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
|
|
|
may also arise when passing options that require values through a
|
|
|
driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as a
|
|
|
separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
|
|
|
and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
|
|
|
the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
|
|
|
|
|
|
gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the
|
|
|
GNU linker:
|
|
|
|
|
|
'@FILE'
|
|
|
Read command-line options from FILE. The options read are inserted
|
|
|
in place of the original @FILE option. If FILE does not exist, or
|
|
|
cannot be read, then the option will be treated literally, and not
|
|
|
removed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Options in FILE are separated by whitespace. A whitespace
|
|
|
character may be included in an option by surrounding the entire
|
|
|
option in either single or double quotes. Any character (including
|
|
|
a backslash) may be included by prefixing the character to be
|
|
|
included with a backslash. The FILE may itself contain additional
|
|
|
@FILE options; any such options will be processed recursively.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-a KEYWORD'
|
|
|
This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The KEYWORD
|
|
|
argument must be one of the strings 'archive', 'shared', or
|
|
|
'default'. '-aarchive' is functionally equivalent to '-Bstatic',
|
|
|
and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent to
|
|
|
'-Bdynamic'. This option may be used any number of times.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--audit AUDITLIB'
|
|
|
Adds AUDITLIB to the 'DT_AUDIT' entry of the dynamic section.
|
|
|
AUDITLIB is not checked for existence, nor will it use the
|
|
|
DT_SONAME specified in the library. If specified multiple times
|
|
|
'DT_AUDIT' will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces
|
|
|
to use. If the linker finds an object with an audit entry while
|
|
|
searching for shared libraries, it will add a corresponding
|
|
|
'DT_DEPAUDIT' entry in the output file. This option is only
|
|
|
meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-b INPUT-FORMAT'
|
|
|
'--format=INPUT-FORMAT'
|
|
|
'ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
|
|
|
file. If your 'ld' is configured this way, you can use the '-b'
|
|
|
option to specify the binary format for input object files that
|
|
|
follow this option on the command line. Even when 'ld' is
|
|
|
configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually
|
|
|
need to specify this, as 'ld' should be configured to expect as a
|
|
|
default input format the most usual format on each machine.
|
|
|
INPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the name of a particular format
|
|
|
supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
|
|
|
formats with 'objdump -i'.) *Note BFD::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an
|
|
|
unusual binary format. You can also use '-b' to switch formats
|
|
|
explicitly (when linking object files of different formats), by
|
|
|
including '-b INPUT-FORMAT' before each group of object files in a
|
|
|
particular format.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The default format is taken from the environment variable
|
|
|
'GNUTARGET'. *Note Environment::. You can also define the input
|
|
|
format from a script, using the command 'TARGET'; see *note Format
|
|
|
Commands::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-c MRI-COMMANDFILE'
|
|
|
'--mri-script=MRI-COMMANDFILE'
|
|
|
For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, 'ld' accepts script
|
|
|
files written in an alternate, restricted command language,
|
|
|
described in *note MRI Compatible Script Files: MRI. Introduce MRI
|
|
|
script files with the option '-c'; use the '-T' option to run
|
|
|
linker scripts written in the general-purpose 'ld' scripting
|
|
|
language. If MRI-CMDFILE does not exist, 'ld' looks for it in the
|
|
|
directories specified by any '-L' options.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-d'
|
|
|
'-dc'
|
|
|
'-dp'
|
|
|
These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported
|
|
|
for compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common
|
|
|
symbols even if a relocatable output file is specified (with '-r').
|
|
|
The script command 'FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same effect.
|
|
|
*Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--depaudit AUDITLIB'
|
|
|
'-P AUDITLIB'
|
|
|
Adds AUDITLIB to the 'DT_DEPAUDIT' entry of the dynamic section.
|
|
|
AUDITLIB is not checked for existence, nor will it use the
|
|
|
DT_SONAME specified in the library. If specified multiple times
|
|
|
'DT_DEPAUDIT' will contain a colon separated list of audit
|
|
|
interfaces to use. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
|
|
|
supporting the rtld-audit interface. The -P option is provided for
|
|
|
Solaris compatibility.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-e ENTRY'
|
|
|
'--entry=ENTRY'
|
|
|
Use ENTRY as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
|
|
|
program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no
|
|
|
symbol named ENTRY, the linker will try to parse ENTRY as a number,
|
|
|
and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted
|
|
|
in base 10; you may use a leading '0x' for base 16, or a leading
|
|
|
'0' for base 8). *Note Entry Point::, for a discussion of defaults
|
|
|
and other ways of specifying the entry point.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--exclude-libs LIB,LIB,...'
|
|
|
Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not
|
|
|
be automatically exported. The library names may be delimited by
|
|
|
commas or colons. Specifying '--exclude-libs ALL' excludes symbols
|
|
|
in all archive libraries from automatic export. This option is
|
|
|
available only for the i386 PE targeted port of the linker and for
|
|
|
ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols explicitly listed in a
|
|
|
.def file are still exported, regardless of this option. For ELF
|
|
|
targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will be treated as
|
|
|
hidden.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--exclude-modules-for-implib MODULE,MODULE,...'
|
|
|
Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which
|
|
|
symbols should not be automatically exported, but which should be
|
|
|
copied wholesale into the import library being generated during the
|
|
|
link. The module names may be delimited by commas or colons, and
|
|
|
must match exactly the filenames used by 'ld' to open the files;
|
|
|
for archive members, this is simply the member name, but for object
|
|
|
files the name listed must include and match precisely any path
|
|
|
used to specify the input file on the linker's command-line. This
|
|
|
option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
|
|
linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still
|
|
|
exported, regardless of this option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-E'
|
|
|
'--export-dynamic'
|
|
|
'--no-export-dynamic'
|
|
|
When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the '-E'
|
|
|
option or the '--export-dynamic' option causes the linker to add
|
|
|
all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table
|
|
|
is the set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run
|
|
|
time.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you do not use either of these options (or use the
|
|
|
'--no-export-dynamic' option to restore the default behavior), the
|
|
|
dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which
|
|
|
are referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you use 'dlopen' to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
|
|
|
back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
|
|
|
dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
|
|
|
linking the program itself.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should be
|
|
|
added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
|
|
|
See the description of '--dynamic-list'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE
|
|
|
targets support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL
|
|
|
or EXE; see the description of '--export-all-symbols' below.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-EB'
|
|
|
Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-EL'
|
|
|
Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output
|
|
|
format.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-f NAME'
|
|
|
'--auxiliary=NAME'
|
|
|
When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY
|
|
|
field to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that
|
|
|
the symbol table of the shared object should be used as an
|
|
|
auxiliary filter on the symbol table of the shared object NAME.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
|
|
|
you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY
|
|
|
field. If the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter
|
|
|
object, it will first check whether there is a definition in the
|
|
|
shared object NAME. If there is one, it will be used instead of
|
|
|
the definition in the filter object. The shared object NAME need
|
|
|
not exist. Thus the shared object NAME may be used to provide an
|
|
|
alternative implementation of certain functions, perhaps for
|
|
|
debugging or for machine-specific performance.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY
|
|
|
entries will be created in the order in which they appear on the
|
|
|
command line.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-F NAME'
|
|
|
'--filter=NAME'
|
|
|
When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER
|
|
|
field to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that
|
|
|
the symbol table of the shared object which is being created should
|
|
|
be used as a filter on the symbol table of the shared object NAME.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when
|
|
|
you run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER
|
|
|
field. The dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the
|
|
|
symbol table of the filter object as usual, but it will actually
|
|
|
link to the definitions found in the shared object NAME. Thus the
|
|
|
filter object can be used to select a subset of the symbols
|
|
|
provided by the object NAME.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some older linkers used the '-F' option throughout a compilation
|
|
|
toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and
|
|
|
output object files. The GNU linker uses other mechanisms for this
|
|
|
purpose: the '-b', '--format', '--oformat' options, the 'TARGET'
|
|
|
command in linker scripts, and the 'GNUTARGET' environment
|
|
|
variable. The GNU linker will ignore the '-F' option when not
|
|
|
creating an ELF shared object.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-fini=NAME'
|
|
|
When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
|
|
|
the executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to
|
|
|
the address of the function. By default, the linker uses '_fini'
|
|
|
as the function to call.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-g'
|
|
|
Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-G VALUE'
|
|
|
'--gpsize=VALUE'
|
|
|
Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP
|
|
|
register to SIZE. This is only meaningful for object file formats
|
|
|
such as MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into
|
|
|
different sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-h NAME'
|
|
|
'-soname=NAME'
|
|
|
When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME
|
|
|
field to the specified name. When an executable is linked with a
|
|
|
shared object which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable
|
|
|
is run the dynamic linker will attempt to load the shared object
|
|
|
specified by the DT_SONAME field rather than the using the file
|
|
|
name given to the linker.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-i'
|
|
|
Perform an incremental link (same as option '-r').
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-init=NAME'
|
|
|
When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when
|
|
|
the executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to
|
|
|
the address of the function. By default, the linker uses '_init'
|
|
|
as the function to call.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-l NAMESPEC'
|
|
|
'--library=NAMESPEC'
|
|
|
Add the archive or object file specified by NAMESPEC to the list of
|
|
|
files to link. This option may be used any number of times. If
|
|
|
NAMESPEC is of the form ':FILENAME', 'ld' will search the library
|
|
|
path for a file called FILENAME, otherwise it will search the
|
|
|
library path for a file called 'libNAMESPEC.a'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
On systems which support shared libraries, 'ld' may also search for
|
|
|
files other than 'libNAMESPEC.a'. Specifically, on ELF and SunOS
|
|
|
systems, 'ld' will search a directory for a library called
|
|
|
'libNAMESPEC.so' before searching for one called 'libNAMESPEC.a'.
|
|
|
(By convention, a '.so' extension indicates a shared library.)
|
|
|
Note that this behavior does not apply to ':FILENAME', which always
|
|
|
specifies a file called FILENAME.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where
|
|
|
it is specified on the command line. If the archive defines a
|
|
|
symbol which was undefined in some object which appeared before the
|
|
|
archive on the command line, the linker will include the
|
|
|
appropriate file(s) from the archive. However, an undefined symbol
|
|
|
in an object appearing later on the command line will not cause the
|
|
|
linker to search the archive again.
|
|
|
|
|
|
See the '-(' option for a way to force the linker to search
|
|
|
archives multiple times.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers.
|
|
|
However, if you are using 'ld' on AIX, note that it is different
|
|
|
from the behaviour of the AIX linker.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-L SEARCHDIR'
|
|
|
'--library-path=SEARCHDIR'
|
|
|
Add path SEARCHDIR to the list of paths that 'ld' will search for
|
|
|
archive libraries and 'ld' control scripts. You may use this
|
|
|
option any number of times. The directories are searched in the
|
|
|
order in which they are specified on the command line. Directories
|
|
|
specified on the command line are searched before the default
|
|
|
directories. All '-L' options apply to all '-l' options,
|
|
|
regardless of the order in which the options appear. '-L' options
|
|
|
do not affect how 'ld' searches for a linker script unless '-T'
|
|
|
option is specified.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If SEARCHDIR begins with '=' or '$SYSROOT', then this prefix will
|
|
|
be replaced by the "sysroot prefix", controlled by the '--sysroot'
|
|
|
option, or specified when the linker is configured.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
|
|
|
'-L') depends on which emulation mode 'ld' is using, and in some
|
|
|
cases also on how it was configured. *Note Environment::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
|
|
|
'SEARCH_DIR' command. Directories specified this way are searched
|
|
|
at the point in which the linker script appears in the command
|
|
|
line.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-m EMULATION'
|
|
|
Emulate the EMULATION linker. You can list the available
|
|
|
emulations with the '--verbose' or '-V' options.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the '-m' option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
|
|
|
'LDEMULATION' environment variable, if that is defined.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
|
|
|
configured.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-M'
|
|
|
'--print-map'
|
|
|
Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
|
|
|
information about the link, including the following:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Where object files are mapped into memory.
|
|
|
* How common symbols are allocated.
|
|
|
* All archive members included in the link, with a mention of
|
|
|
the symbol which caused the archive member to be brought in.
|
|
|
* The values assigned to symbols.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression
|
|
|
which involves a reference to a previous value of the same
|
|
|
symbol may not have correct result displayed in the link map.
|
|
|
This is because the linker discards intermediate results and
|
|
|
only retains the final value of an expression. Under such
|
|
|
circumstances the linker will display the final value enclosed
|
|
|
by square brackets. Thus for example a linker script
|
|
|
containing:
|
|
|
|
|
|
foo = 1
|
|
|
foo = foo * 4
|
|
|
foo = foo + 8
|
|
|
|
|
|
will produce the following output in the link map if the '-M'
|
|
|
option is used:
|
|
|
|
|
|
0x00000001 foo = 0x1
|
|
|
[0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
|
|
|
[0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
|
|
|
|
|
|
See *note Expressions:: for more information about expressions
|
|
|
in linker scripts.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* How GNU properties are merged.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into
|
|
|
one output .note.gnu.property section, some properties are
|
|
|
removed or updated. These actions are reported in the link
|
|
|
map. For example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
|
|
|
|
|
|
This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output
|
|
|
when merging properties in 'foo.o', whose property 0xc0000002
|
|
|
value is 0x1, and 'bar.o', which doesn't have property
|
|
|
0xc0000002.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
|
|
|
|
|
|
This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to
|
|
|
0x1 in output when merging properties in 'foo.o', whose
|
|
|
0xc0010001 property value is 0x1, and 'bar.o', whose
|
|
|
0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--print-map-discarded'
|
|
|
'--no-print-map-discarded'
|
|
|
Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected
|
|
|
sections in the link map. Enabled by default.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-n'
|
|
|
'--nmagic'
|
|
|
Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against
|
|
|
shared libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic
|
|
|
numbers, mark the output as 'NMAGIC'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-N'
|
|
|
'--omagic'
|
|
|
Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also,
|
|
|
do not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against
|
|
|
shared libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic
|
|
|
numbers, mark the output as 'OMAGIC'. Note: Although a writable
|
|
|
text section is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to
|
|
|
the format specification published by Microsoft.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--no-omagic'
|
|
|
This option negates most of the effects of the '-N' option. It
|
|
|
sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment
|
|
|
to be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking
|
|
|
against shared libraries. Use '-Bdynamic' for this.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-o OUTPUT'
|
|
|
'--output=OUTPUT'
|
|
|
Use OUTPUT as the name for the program produced by 'ld'; if this
|
|
|
option is not specified, the name 'a.out' is used by default. The
|
|
|
script command 'OUTPUT' can also specify the output file name.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-O LEVEL'
|
|
|
If LEVEL is a numeric values greater than zero 'ld' optimizes the
|
|
|
output. This might take significantly longer and therefore
|
|
|
probably should only be enabled for the final binary. At the
|
|
|
moment this option only affects ELF shared library generation.
|
|
|
Future releases of the linker may make more use of this option.
|
|
|
Also currently there is no difference in the linker's behaviour for
|
|
|
different non-zero values of this option. Again this may change
|
|
|
with future releases.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-plugin NAME'
|
|
|
Involve a plugin in the linking process. The NAME parameter is the
|
|
|
absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
|
|
|
automatically added by the complier, when using link time
|
|
|
optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
|
|
|
wish.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is
|
|
|
different from the place where the 'ar', 'nm' and 'ranlib' programs
|
|
|
search for their plugins. In order for those commands to make use
|
|
|
of a compiler based plugin it must first be copied into the
|
|
|
'${libdir}/bfd-plugins' directory. All gcc based linker plugins
|
|
|
are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to just copy in the
|
|
|
newest one.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--push-state'
|
|
|
The '--push-state' allows to preserve the current state of the
|
|
|
flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
|
|
|
restored with one corresponding '--pop-state' option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The option which are covered are: '-Bdynamic', '-Bstatic', '-dn',
|
|
|
'-dy', '-call_shared', '-non_shared', '-static', '-N', '-n',
|
|
|
'--whole-archive', '--no-whole-archive', '-r', '-Ur',
|
|
|
'--copy-dt-needed-entries', '--no-copy-dt-needed-entries',
|
|
|
'--as-needed', '--no-as-needed', and '-a'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
One target for this option are specifications for 'pkg-config'.
|
|
|
When used with the '--libs' option all possibly needed libraries
|
|
|
are listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is
|
|
|
better to return something as follows:
|
|
|
|
|
|
-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--pop-state'
|
|
|
Undoes the effect of -push-state, restores the previous values of
|
|
|
the flags governing input file handling.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-q'
|
|
|
'--emit-relocs'
|
|
|
Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
|
|
|
Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information
|
|
|
in order to perform correct modifications of executables. This
|
|
|
results in larger executables.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--force-dynamic'
|
|
|
Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is
|
|
|
specific to VxWorks targets.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-r'
|
|
|
'--relocatable'
|
|
|
Generate relocatable output--i.e., generate an output file that can
|
|
|
in turn serve as input to 'ld'. This is often called "partial
|
|
|
linking". As a side effect, in environments that support standard
|
|
|
Unix magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic
|
|
|
number to 'OMAGIC'. If this option is not specified, an absolute
|
|
|
file is produced. When linking C++ programs, this option _will
|
|
|
not_ resolve references to constructors; to do that, use '-Ur'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When an input file does not have the same format as the output
|
|
|
file, partial linking is only supported if that input file does not
|
|
|
contain any relocations. Different output formats can have further
|
|
|
restrictions; for example some 'a.out'-based formats do not support
|
|
|
partial linking with input files in other formats at all.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This option does the same thing as '-i'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-R FILENAME'
|
|
|
'--just-symbols=FILENAME'
|
|
|
Read symbol names and their addresses from FILENAME, but do not
|
|
|
relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output
|
|
|
file to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined
|
|
|
in other programs. You may use this option more than once.
|
|
|
|
|
|
For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the '-R' option is
|
|
|
followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
|
|
|
treated as the '-rpath' option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-s'
|
|
|
'--strip-all'
|
|
|
Omit all symbol information from the output file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-S'
|
|
|
'--strip-debug'
|
|
|
Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the
|
|
|
output file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--strip-discarded'
|
|
|
'--no-strip-discarded'
|
|
|
Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
|
|
|
Enabled by default.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-t'
|
|
|
'--trace'
|
|
|
Print the names of the input files as 'ld' processes them. If '-t'
|
|
|
is given twice then members within archives are also printed. '-t'
|
|
|
output is useful to generate a list of all the object files and
|
|
|
scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
|
|
|
a linker bug report.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-T SCRIPTFILE'
|
|
|
'--script=SCRIPTFILE'
|
|
|
Use SCRIPTFILE as the linker script. This script replaces 'ld''s
|
|
|
default linker script (rather than adding to it), so COMMANDFILE
|
|
|
must specify everything necessary to describe the output file.
|
|
|
*Note Scripts::. If SCRIPTFILE does not exist in the current
|
|
|
directory, 'ld' looks for it in the directories specified by any
|
|
|
preceding '-L' options. Multiple '-T' options accumulate.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-dT SCRIPTFILE'
|
|
|
'--default-script=SCRIPTFILE'
|
|
|
Use SCRIPTFILE as the default linker script. *Note Scripts::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This option is similar to the '--script' option except that
|
|
|
processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
|
|
|
command line has been processed. This allows options placed after
|
|
|
the '--default-script' option on the command line to affect the
|
|
|
behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the
|
|
|
linker command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg
|
|
|
because the command line is being constructed by another tool, such
|
|
|
as 'gcc').
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-u SYMBOL'
|
|
|
'--undefined=SYMBOL'
|
|
|
Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
|
|
|
symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
|
|
|
modules from standard libraries. '-u' may be repeated with
|
|
|
different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols.
|
|
|
This option is equivalent to the 'EXTERN' linker script command.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If this option is being used to force additional modules to be
|
|
|
pulled into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to
|
|
|
remain undefined, then the option '--require-defined' should be
|
|
|
used instead.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--require-defined=SYMBOL'
|
|
|
Require that SYMBOL is defined in the output file. This option is
|
|
|
the same as option '--undefined' except that if SYMBOL is not
|
|
|
defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error and
|
|
|
exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
|
|
|
'EXTERN', 'ASSERT' and 'DEFINED' together. This option can be used
|
|
|
multiple times to require additional symbols.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-Ur'
|
|
|
For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
|
|
|
'-r': it generates relocatable output--i.e., an output file that
|
|
|
can in turn serve as input to 'ld'. When linking C++ programs,
|
|
|
'-Ur' _does_ resolve references to constructors, unlike '-r'. It
|
|
|
does not work to use '-Ur' on files that were themselves linked
|
|
|
with '-Ur'; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot be
|
|
|
added to. Use '-Ur' only for the last partial link, and '-r' for
|
|
|
the others.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--orphan-handling=MODE'
|
|
|
Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one
|
|
|
not specifically mentioned in a linker script. *Note Orphan
|
|
|
Sections::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
MODE can have any of the following values:
|
|
|
|
|
|
'place'
|
|
|
Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section
|
|
|
following the strategy described in *note Orphan Sections::.
|
|
|
The option '--unique' also affects how sections are placed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'discard'
|
|
|
All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
|
|
|
'/DISCARD/' section (*note Output Section Discarding::).
|
|
|
|
|
|
'warn'
|
|
|
The linker will place the orphan section as for 'place' and
|
|
|
also issue a warning.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'error'
|
|
|
The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is
|
|
|
found.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The default if '--orphan-handling' is not given is 'place'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--unique[=SECTION]'
|
|
|
Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
|
|
|
SECTION, or if the optional wildcard SECTION argument is missing,
|
|
|
for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
|
|
|
specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
|
|
|
multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging
|
|
|
of input sections with the same name, overriding output section
|
|
|
assignments in a linker script.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-v'
|
|
|
'--version'
|
|
|
'-V'
|
|
|
Display the version number for 'ld'. The '-V' option also lists
|
|
|
the supported emulations.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-x'
|
|
|
'--discard-all'
|
|
|
Delete all local symbols.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-X'
|
|
|
'--discard-locals'
|
|
|
Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
|
|
|
system-specific local label prefixes, typically '.L' for ELF
|
|
|
systems or 'L' for traditional a.out systems.)
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-y SYMBOL'
|
|
|
'--trace-symbol=SYMBOL'
|
|
|
Print the name of each linked file in which SYMBOL appears. This
|
|
|
option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is
|
|
|
necessary to prepend an underscore.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your
|
|
|
link but don't know where the reference is coming from.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-Y PATH'
|
|
|
Add PATH to the default library search path. This option exists
|
|
|
for Solaris compatibility.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-z KEYWORD'
|
|
|
The recognized keywords are:
|
|
|
|
|
|
'bndplt'
|
|
|
Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for
|
|
|
Linux/x86_64.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'call-nop=prefix-addr'
|
|
|
'call-nop=suffix-nop'
|
|
|
'call-nop=prefix-BYTE'
|
|
|
'call-nop=suffix-BYTE'
|
|
|
Specify the 1-byte 'NOP' padding when transforming indirect
|
|
|
call to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
|
|
|
'call-nop=prefix-addr' generates '0x67 call foo'.
|
|
|
'call-nop=suffix-nop' generates 'call foo 0x90'.
|
|
|
'call-nop=prefix-BYTE' generates 'BYTE call foo'.
|
|
|
'call-nop=suffix-BYTE' generates 'call foo BYTE'. Supported
|
|
|
for i386 and x86_64.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'cet-report=none'
|
|
|
'cet-report=warning'
|
|
|
'cet-report=error'
|
|
|
Specify how to report the missing
|
|
|
GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
|
|
|
GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input
|
|
|
.note.gnu.property section. 'cet-report=none', which is the
|
|
|
default, will make the linker not report missing properties in
|
|
|
input files. 'cet-report=warning' will make the linker issue
|
|
|
a warning for missing properties in input files.
|
|
|
'cet-report=error' will make the linker issue an error for
|
|
|
missing properties in input files. Note that 'ibt' will turn
|
|
|
off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report
|
|
|
and 'shstk' will turn off the missing
|
|
|
GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report. Supported
|
|
|
for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'combreloc'
|
|
|
'nocombreloc'
|
|
|
Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to
|
|
|
improve dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if
|
|
|
'nocombreloc'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'common'
|
|
|
'nocommon'
|
|
|
Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a
|
|
|
relocatable link. Use STT_OBJECT type if 'nocommon'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'common-page-size=VALUE'
|
|
|
Set the page size most commonly used to VALUE. Memory image
|
|
|
layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the
|
|
|
system is using pages of this size.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'defs'
|
|
|
Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files.
|
|
|
This is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic
|
|
|
shared library. This option is the inverse of '-z undefs'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'dynamic-undefined-weak'
|
|
|
'nodynamic-undefined-weak'
|
|
|
Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic
|
|
|
object, if they are referenced from a regular object file and
|
|
|
not forced local by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not
|
|
|
make them dynamic if 'nodynamic-undefined-weak'. If neither
|
|
|
option is given, a target may default to either option being
|
|
|
in force, or make some other selection of undefined weak
|
|
|
symbols dynamic. Not all targets support these options.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'execstack'
|
|
|
Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'global'
|
|
|
This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
|
|
|
It makes the symbols defined by this shared object available
|
|
|
for symbol resolution of subsequently loaded libraries.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'globalaudit'
|
|
|
This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic
|
|
|
executable. This option marks the executable as requiring
|
|
|
global auditing by setting the 'DF_1_GLOBAUDIT' bit in the
|
|
|
'DT_FLAGS_1' dynamic tag. Global auditing requires that any
|
|
|
auditing library defined via the '--depaudit' or '-P'
|
|
|
command-line options be run for all dynamic objects loaded by
|
|
|
the application.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'ibtplt'
|
|
|
Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT
|
|
|
entries. Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'ibt'
|
|
|
Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property
|
|
|
section to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies
|
|
|
'ibtplt'. Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'initfirst'
|
|
|
This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
|
|
|
It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will
|
|
|
occur before the runtime initialization of any other objects
|
|
|
brought into the process at the same time. Similarly the
|
|
|
runtime finalization of the object will occur after the
|
|
|
runtime finalization of any other objects.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'interpose'
|
|
|
Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol
|
|
|
search order so that symbols in this shared library interpose
|
|
|
all other shared libraries not so marked.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'lazy'
|
|
|
When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
|
|
|
tell the dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to
|
|
|
the point when the function is called (lazy binding), rather
|
|
|
than at load time. Lazy binding is the default.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'loadfltr'
|
|
|
Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at
|
|
|
runtime.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'max-page-size=VALUE'
|
|
|
Set the maximum memory page size supported to VALUE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'muldefs'
|
|
|
Allow multiple definitions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'nocopyreloc'
|
|
|
Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of
|
|
|
variables defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic
|
|
|
text relocations.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'nodefaultlib'
|
|
|
Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of
|
|
|
this object should ignore any default library search paths.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'nodelete'
|
|
|
Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'nodlopen'
|
|
|
Specify that the object is not available to 'dlopen'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'nodump'
|
|
|
Specify that the object can not be dumped by 'dldump'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'noexecstack'
|
|
|
Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'noextern-protected-data'
|
|
|
Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a
|
|
|
shared library. This option overrides the linker backend
|
|
|
default. It can be used to work around incorrect relocations
|
|
|
against protected data symbols generated by compiler. Updates
|
|
|
on protected data symbols by another module aren't visible to
|
|
|
the resulting shared library. Supported for i386 and x86-64.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'noreloc-overflow'
|
|
|
Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to
|
|
|
disable relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic
|
|
|
relocation overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'now'
|
|
|
When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to
|
|
|
tell the dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the
|
|
|
program is started, or when the shared library is loaded by
|
|
|
dlopen, instead of deferring function call resolution to the
|
|
|
point when the function is first called.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'origin'
|
|
|
Specify that the object requires '$ORIGIN' handling in paths.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'relro'
|
|
|
'norelro'
|
|
|
Create an ELF 'PT_GNU_RELRO' segment header in the object.
|
|
|
This specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only
|
|
|
after relocation, if supported. Specifying 'common-page-size'
|
|
|
smaller than the system page size will render this protection
|
|
|
ineffective. Don't create an ELF 'PT_GNU_RELRO' segment if
|
|
|
'norelro'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'separate-code'
|
|
|
'noseparate-code'
|
|
|
Create separate code 'PT_LOAD' segment header in the object.
|
|
|
This specifies a memory segment that should contain only
|
|
|
instructions and must be in wholly disjoint pages from any
|
|
|
other data. Don't create separate code 'PT_LOAD' segment if
|
|
|
'noseparate-code' is used.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'shstk'
|
|
|
Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in
|
|
|
.note.gnu.property section to indicate compatibility with
|
|
|
Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for Linux/i386 and
|
|
|
Linux/x86_64.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'stack-size=VALUE'
|
|
|
Specify a stack size for an ELF 'PT_GNU_STACK' segment.
|
|
|
Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
|
|
|
'PT_GNU_STACK' segment creation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'text'
|
|
|
'notext'
|
|
|
'textoff'
|
|
|
Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has
|
|
|
dynamic relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an
|
|
|
error if 'notext' or 'textoff'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'undefs'
|
|
|
Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object
|
|
|
files, either when creating an executable, or when creating a
|
|
|
shared library. This option is the inverse of '-z defs'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-( ARCHIVES -)'
|
|
|
'--start-group ARCHIVES --end-group'
|
|
|
The ARCHIVES should be a list of archive files. They may be either
|
|
|
explicit file names, or '-l' options.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new
|
|
|
undefined references are created. Normally, an archive is searched
|
|
|
only once in the order that it is specified on the command line.
|
|
|
If a symbol in that archive is needed to resolve an undefined
|
|
|
symbol referred to by an object in an archive that appears later on
|
|
|
the command line, the linker would not be able to resolve that
|
|
|
reference. By grouping the archives, they will all be searched
|
|
|
repeatedly until all possible references are resolved.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best
|
|
|
to use it only when there are unavoidable circular references
|
|
|
between two or more archives.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--accept-unknown-input-arch'
|
|
|
'--no-accept-unknown-input-arch'
|
|
|
Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
|
|
|
recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are
|
|
|
doing and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files.
|
|
|
This was the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14.
|
|
|
The default behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such
|
|
|
input files, and so the '--accept-unknown-input-arch' option has
|
|
|
been added to restore the old behaviour.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--as-needed'
|
|
|
'--no-as-needed'
|
|
|
This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries
|
|
|
mentioned on the command line after the '--as-needed' option.
|
|
|
Normally the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic
|
|
|
library mentioned on the command line, regardless of whether the
|
|
|
library is actually needed or not. '--as-needed' causes a
|
|
|
DT_NEEDED tag to only be emitted for a library that _at that point
|
|
|
in the link_ satisfies a non-weak undefined symbol reference from a
|
|
|
regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
|
|
|
DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a non-weak undefined
|
|
|
symbol reference from another needed dynamic library. Object files
|
|
|
or libraries appearing on the command line _after_ the library in
|
|
|
question do not affect whether the library is seen as needed. This
|
|
|
is similar to the rules for extraction of object files from
|
|
|
archives. '--no-as-needed' restores the default behaviour.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--add-needed'
|
|
|
'--no-add-needed'
|
|
|
These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
|
|
|
their names to the '--as-needed' and '--no-as-needed' options.
|
|
|
They have been replaced by '--copy-dt-needed-entries' and
|
|
|
'--no-copy-dt-needed-entries'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-assert KEYWORD'
|
|
|
This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-Bdynamic'
|
|
|
'-dy'
|
|
|
'-call_shared'
|
|
|
Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on
|
|
|
platforms for which shared libraries are supported. This option is
|
|
|
normally the default on such platforms. The different variants of
|
|
|
this option are for compatibility with various systems. You may
|
|
|
use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
|
|
|
library searching for '-l' options which follow it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-Bgroup'
|
|
|
Set the 'DF_1_GROUP' flag in the 'DT_FLAGS_1' entry in the dynamic
|
|
|
section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
|
|
|
object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
|
|
|
'--unresolved-symbols=report-all' is implied. This option is only
|
|
|
meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-Bstatic'
|
|
|
'-dn'
|
|
|
'-non_shared'
|
|
|
'-static'
|
|
|
Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
|
|
|
platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
|
|
|
variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems.
|
|
|
You may use this option multiple times on the command line: it
|
|
|
affects library searching for '-l' options which follow it. This
|
|
|
option also implies '--unresolved-symbols=report-all'. This option
|
|
|
can be used with '-shared'. Doing so means that a shared library
|
|
|
is being created but that all of the library's external references
|
|
|
must be resolved by pulling in entries from static libraries.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-Bsymbolic'
|
|
|
When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols
|
|
|
to the definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it
|
|
|
is possible for a program linked against a shared library to
|
|
|
override the definition within the shared library. This option is
|
|
|
only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-Bsymbolic-functions'
|
|
|
When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
|
|
|
symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any. This
|
|
|
option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
|
|
|
libraries.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--dynamic-list=DYNAMIC-LIST-FILE'
|
|
|
Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
|
|
|
typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
|
|
|
global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the
|
|
|
definition within the shared library, or creating dynamically
|
|
|
linked executables to specify a list of symbols which should be
|
|
|
added to the symbol table in the executable. This option is only
|
|
|
meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node
|
|
|
without scope and node name. See *note VERSION:: for more
|
|
|
information.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--dynamic-list-data'
|
|
|
Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--dynamic-list-cpp-new'
|
|
|
Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete.
|
|
|
It is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo'
|
|
|
Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type
|
|
|
identification.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--check-sections'
|
|
|
'--no-check-sections'
|
|
|
Asks the linker _not_ to check section addresses after they have
|
|
|
been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the
|
|
|
linker will perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it
|
|
|
will produce suitable error messages. The linker does know about,
|
|
|
and does make allowances for sections in overlays. The default
|
|
|
behaviour can be restored by using the command-line switch
|
|
|
'--check-sections'. Section overlap is not usually checked for
|
|
|
relocatable links. You can force checking in that case by using
|
|
|
the '--check-sections' option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--copy-dt-needed-entries'
|
|
|
'--no-copy-dt-needed-entries'
|
|
|
This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
|
|
|
by DT_NEEDED tags _inside_ ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
|
|
|
command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
|
|
|
output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
|
|
|
input dynamic library. With '--copy-dt-needed-entries' specified
|
|
|
on the command line however any dynamic libraries that follow it
|
|
|
will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default behaviour can
|
|
|
be restored with '--no-copy-dt-needed-entries'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in
|
|
|
dynamic libraries. With '--copy-dt-needed-entries' dynamic
|
|
|
libraries mentioned on the command line will be recursively
|
|
|
searched, following their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in
|
|
|
order to resolve symbols required by the output binary. With the
|
|
|
default setting however the searching of dynamic libraries that
|
|
|
follow it will stop with the dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED
|
|
|
links will be traversed to resolve symbols.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--cref'
|
|
|
Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
|
|
|
generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
|
|
|
Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
|
|
|
easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed
|
|
|
out, sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is
|
|
|
given. If the symbol is defined, the first file listed is the
|
|
|
location of the definition. If the symbol is defined as a common
|
|
|
value then any files where this happens appear next. Finally any
|
|
|
files that reference the symbol are listed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--no-define-common'
|
|
|
This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
|
|
|
The script command 'INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION' has the same effect.
|
|
|
*Note Miscellaneous Commands::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--no-define-common' option allows decoupling the decision to
|
|
|
assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice of the output
|
|
|
file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type forces assigning
|
|
|
addresses to Common symbols. Using '--no-define-common' allows
|
|
|
Common symbols that are referenced from a shared library to be
|
|
|
assigned addresses only in the main program. This eliminates the
|
|
|
unused duplicate space in the shared library, and also prevents any
|
|
|
possible confusion over resolving to the wrong duplicate when there
|
|
|
are many dynamic modules with specialized search paths for runtime
|
|
|
symbol resolution.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--force-group-allocation'
|
|
|
This option causes the linker to place section group members like
|
|
|
normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is
|
|
|
the default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used
|
|
|
to change the behaviour of a relocatable link ('-r'). The script
|
|
|
command 'FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION' has the same effect. *Note
|
|
|
Miscellaneous Commands::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--defsym=SYMBOL=EXPRESSION'
|
|
|
Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
|
|
|
address given by EXPRESSION. You may use this option as many times
|
|
|
as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
|
|
|
limited form of arithmetic is supported for the EXPRESSION in this
|
|
|
context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an
|
|
|
existing symbol, or use '+' and '-' to add or subtract hexadecimal
|
|
|
constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions,
|
|
|
consider using the linker command language from a script (*note
|
|
|
Assignments::). _Note:_ there should be no white space between
|
|
|
SYMBOL, the equals sign ("<=>"), and EXPRESSION.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--demangle[=STYLE]'
|
|
|
'--no-demangle'
|
|
|
These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error
|
|
|
messages and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it
|
|
|
tries to present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips
|
|
|
leading underscores if they are used by the object file format, and
|
|
|
converts C++ mangled symbol names into user readable names.
|
|
|
Different compilers have different mangling styles. The optional
|
|
|
demangling style argument can be used to choose an appropriate
|
|
|
demangling style for your compiler. The linker will demangle by
|
|
|
default unless the environment variable 'COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is
|
|
|
set. These options may be used to override the default.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-IFILE'
|
|
|
'--dynamic-linker=FILE'
|
|
|
Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
|
|
|
generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
|
|
|
linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you
|
|
|
are doing.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--no-dynamic-linker'
|
|
|
When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
|
|
|
linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
|
|
|
executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
|
|
|
entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--embedded-relocs'
|
|
|
This option is similar to the '--emit-relocs' option except that
|
|
|
the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option is
|
|
|
only supported by the 'BFIN', 'CR16' and _M68K_ targets.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--disable-multiple-abs-defs'
|
|
|
Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included in filename
|
|
|
invoked by -R or -just-symbols
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--fatal-warnings'
|
|
|
'--no-fatal-warnings'
|
|
|
Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be
|
|
|
restored with the option '--no-fatal-warnings'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--force-exe-suffix'
|
|
|
Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
|
|
|
'.exe' or '.dll' suffix, this option forces the linker to copy the
|
|
|
output file to one of the same name with a '.exe' suffix. This
|
|
|
option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a
|
|
|
Microsoft Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an
|
|
|
image unless it ends in a '.exe' suffix.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--gc-sections'
|
|
|
'--no-gc-sections'
|
|
|
Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored
|
|
|
on targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour
|
|
|
(of not performing this garbage collection) can be restored by
|
|
|
specifying '--no-gc-sections' on the command line. Note that
|
|
|
garbage collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but
|
|
|
the implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--gc-sections' decides which input sections are used by examining
|
|
|
symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry symbol
|
|
|
and all sections containing symbols undefined on the command-line
|
|
|
will be kept, as will sections containing symbols referenced by
|
|
|
dynamic objects. Note that when building shared libraries, the
|
|
|
linker must assume that any visible symbol is referenced. Once
|
|
|
this initial set of sections has been determined, the linker
|
|
|
recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
|
|
|
relocations. See '--entry', '--undefined', and
|
|
|
'--gc-keep-exported'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with
|
|
|
option '-r'). In this case the root of symbols kept must be
|
|
|
explicitly specified either by one of the options '--entry',
|
|
|
'--undefined', or '--gc-keep-exported' or by a 'ENTRY' command in
|
|
|
the linker script.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--print-gc-sections'
|
|
|
'--no-print-gc-sections'
|
|
|
List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
|
|
|
printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
|
|
|
collection has been enabled via the '--gc-sections') option. The
|
|
|
default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed)
|
|
|
can be restored by specifying '--no-print-gc-sections' on the
|
|
|
command line.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--gc-keep-exported'
|
|
|
When '--gc-sections' is enabled, this option prevents garbage
|
|
|
collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols
|
|
|
having default or protected visibility. This option is intended to
|
|
|
be used for executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise
|
|
|
be garbage collected regardless of the external visibility of
|
|
|
contained symbols. Note that this option has no effect when
|
|
|
linking shared objects since it is already the default behaviour.
|
|
|
This option is only supported for ELF format targets.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--print-output-format'
|
|
|
Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
|
|
|
other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
|
|
|
in an 'OUTPUT_FORMAT' linker script command (*note File
|
|
|
Commands::).
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--print-memory-usage'
|
|
|
Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created
|
|
|
with the *note MEMORY:: command. This is useful on embedded
|
|
|
targets to have a quick view of amount of free memory. The format
|
|
|
of the output has one headline and one line per region. It is both
|
|
|
human readable and easily parsable by tools. Here is an example of
|
|
|
an output:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
|
|
|
ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
|
|
|
RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--help'
|
|
|
Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output
|
|
|
and exit.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--target-help'
|
|
|
Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard
|
|
|
output and exit.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-Map=MAPFILE'
|
|
|
Print a link map to the file MAPFILE. See the description of the
|
|
|
'-M' option, above.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--no-keep-memory'
|
|
|
'ld' normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
|
|
|
symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells 'ld' to
|
|
|
instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables
|
|
|
as necessary. This may be required if 'ld' runs out of memory
|
|
|
space while linking a large executable.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--no-undefined'
|
|
|
'-z defs'
|
|
|
Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files.
|
|
|
This is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared
|
|
|
library. The switch '--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' controls the
|
|
|
behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
|
|
|
libraries being linked in.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The effects of this option can be reverted by using '-z undefs'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--allow-multiple-definition'
|
|
|
'-z muldefs'
|
|
|
Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
|
|
|
report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and
|
|
|
the first definition will be used.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--allow-shlib-undefined'
|
|
|
'--no-allow-shlib-undefined'
|
|
|
Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries. This
|
|
|
switch is similar to '--no-undefined' except that it determines the
|
|
|
behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a shared library rather
|
|
|
than a regular object file. It does not affect how undefined
|
|
|
symbols in regular object files are handled.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
|
|
|
referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to
|
|
|
create an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used
|
|
|
to create a shared library.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
|
|
|
libraries specified at link time are that:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as
|
|
|
the one that is available at load time, so the symbol might
|
|
|
actually be resolvable at load time.
|
|
|
* There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where
|
|
|
undefined symbols in shared libraries are normal.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load
|
|
|
time to select whichever function is most appropriate for the
|
|
|
current architecture. This is used, for example, to
|
|
|
dynamically select an appropriate memset function.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--no-undefined-version'
|
|
|
Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will
|
|
|
ignore it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version
|
|
|
and a fatal error will be issued instead.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--default-symver'
|
|
|
Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
|
|
|
unversioned exported symbols.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--default-imported-symver'
|
|
|
Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for
|
|
|
unversioned imported symbols.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--no-warn-mismatch'
|
|
|
Normally 'ld' will give an error if you try to link together input
|
|
|
files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they
|
|
|
have been compiled for different processors or for different
|
|
|
endiannesses. This option tells 'ld' that it should silently
|
|
|
permit such possible errors. This option should only be used with
|
|
|
care, in cases when you have taken some special action that ensures
|
|
|
that the linker errors are inappropriate.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--no-warn-search-mismatch'
|
|
|
Normally 'ld' will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
|
|
|
library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--no-whole-archive'
|
|
|
Turn off the effect of the '--whole-archive' option for subsequent
|
|
|
archive files.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--noinhibit-exec'
|
|
|
Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
|
|
|
Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it
|
|
|
encounters errors during the link process; it exits without writing
|
|
|
an output file when it issues any error whatsoever.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-nostdlib'
|
|
|
Only search library directories explicitly specified on the command
|
|
|
line. Library directories specified in linker scripts (including
|
|
|
linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--oformat=OUTPUT-FORMAT'
|
|
|
'ld' may be configured to support more than one kind of object
|
|
|
file. If your 'ld' is configured this way, you can use the
|
|
|
'--oformat' option to specify the binary format for the output
|
|
|
object file. Even when 'ld' is configured to support alternative
|
|
|
object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as 'ld'
|
|
|
should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
|
|
|
usual format on each machine. OUTPUT-FORMAT is a text string, the
|
|
|
name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You
|
|
|
can list the available binary formats with 'objdump -i'.) The
|
|
|
script command 'OUTPUT_FORMAT' can also specify the output format,
|
|
|
but this option overrides it. *Note BFD::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--out-implib FILE'
|
|
|
Create an import library in FILE corresponding to the executable
|
|
|
the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
|
|
|
library (which should be called '*.dll.a' or '*.a' for DLLs) may be
|
|
|
used to link clients against the generated executable; this
|
|
|
behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library
|
|
|
creation step (eg. 'dlltool' for DLLs). This option is only
|
|
|
available for the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-pie'
|
|
|
'--pic-executable'
|
|
|
Create a position independent executable. This is currently only
|
|
|
supported on ELF platforms. Position independent executables are
|
|
|
similar to shared libraries in that they are relocated by the
|
|
|
dynamic linker to the virtual address the OS chooses for them
|
|
|
(which can vary between invocations). Like normal dynamically
|
|
|
linked executables they can be executed and symbols defined in the
|
|
|
executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-qmagic'
|
|
|
This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-Qy'
|
|
|
This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--relax'
|
|
|
'--no-relax'
|
|
|
An option with machine dependent effects. This option is only
|
|
|
supported on a few targets. *Note 'ld' and the H8/300: H8/300.
|
|
|
*Note 'ld' and Xtensa Processors: Xtensa. *Note 'ld' and the
|
|
|
68HC11 and 68HC12: M68HC11/68HC12. *Note 'ld' and the Altera Nios
|
|
|
II: Nios II. *Note 'ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support: PowerPC
|
|
|
ELF32.
|
|
|
|
|
|
On some platforms the '--relax' option performs target-specific,
|
|
|
global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
|
|
|
addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
|
|
|
synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
|
|
|
instructions, and combining constant values.
|
|
|
|
|
|
On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make
|
|
|
symbolic debugging of the resulting executable impossible. This is
|
|
|
known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family
|
|
|
of processors.
|
|
|
|
|
|
On platforms where this is not supported, '--relax' is accepted,
|
|
|
but ignored.
|
|
|
|
|
|
On platforms where '--relax' is accepted the option '--no-relax'
|
|
|
can be used to disable the feature.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--retain-symbols-file=FILENAME'
|
|
|
Retain _only_ the symbols listed in the file FILENAME, discarding
|
|
|
all others. FILENAME is simply a flat file, with one symbol name
|
|
|
per line. This option is especially useful in environments (such
|
|
|
as VxWorks) where a large global symbol table is accumulated
|
|
|
gradually, to conserve run-time memory.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--retain-symbols-file' does _not_ discard undefined symbols, or
|
|
|
symbols needed for relocations.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may only specify '--retain-symbols-file' once in the command
|
|
|
line. It overrides '-s' and '-S'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-rpath=DIR'
|
|
|
Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used
|
|
|
when linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All '-rpath'
|
|
|
arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which
|
|
|
uses them to locate shared objects at runtime.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '-rpath' option is also used when locating shared objects which
|
|
|
are needed by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see
|
|
|
the description of the '-rpath-link' option. Searching '-rpath' in
|
|
|
this way is only supported by native linkers and cross linkers
|
|
|
which have been configured with the '--with-sysroot' option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If '-rpath' is not used when linking an ELF executable, the
|
|
|
contents of the environment variable 'LD_RUN_PATH' will be used if
|
|
|
it is defined.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '-rpath' option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
|
|
|
SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
|
|
|
'-L' options it is given. If a '-rpath' option is used, the
|
|
|
runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the '-rpath'
|
|
|
options, ignoring the '-L' options. This can be useful when using
|
|
|
gcc, which adds many '-L' options which may be on NFS mounted file
|
|
|
systems.
|
|
|
|
|
|
For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the '-R' option is
|
|
|
followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is
|
|
|
treated as the '-rpath' option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-rpath-link=DIR'
|
|
|
When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another.
|
|
|
This happens when an 'ld -shared' link includes a shared library as
|
|
|
one of the input files.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a
|
|
|
non-shared, non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to
|
|
|
locate the required shared library and include it in the link, if
|
|
|
it is not included explicitly. In such a case, the '-rpath-link'
|
|
|
option specifies the first set of directories to search. The
|
|
|
'-rpath-link' option may specify a sequence of directory names
|
|
|
either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
|
|
|
appearing multiple times.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The tokens $ORIGIN and $LIB can appear in these search directories.
|
|
|
They will be replaced by the full path to the directory containing
|
|
|
the program or shared object in the case of $ORIGIN and either
|
|
|
'lib' - for 32-bit binaries - or 'lib64' - for 64-bit binaries - in
|
|
|
the case of $LIB.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The alternative form of these tokens - ${ORIGIN} and ${LIB} can
|
|
|
also be used. The token $PLATFORM is not supported.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search
|
|
|
path that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In
|
|
|
such a case it is possible to use unintentionally a different
|
|
|
search path than the runtime linker would do.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The linker uses the following search paths to locate required
|
|
|
shared libraries:
|
|
|
1. Any directories specified by '-rpath-link' options.
|
|
|
2. Any directories specified by '-rpath' options. The difference
|
|
|
between '-rpath' and '-rpath-link' is that directories
|
|
|
specified by '-rpath' options are included in the executable
|
|
|
and used at runtime, whereas the '-rpath-link' option is only
|
|
|
effective at link time. Searching '-rpath' in this way is
|
|
|
only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which have
|
|
|
been configured with the '--with-sysroot' option.
|
|
|
3. On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the '-rpath' and
|
|
|
'-rpath-link' options were not used, search the contents of
|
|
|
the environment variable 'LD_RUN_PATH'.
|
|
|
4. On SunOS, if the '-rpath' option was not used, search any
|
|
|
directories specified using '-L' options.
|
|
|
5. For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
|
|
|
variable 'LD_LIBRARY_PATH'.
|
|
|
6. For a native ELF linker, the directories in 'DT_RUNPATH' or
|
|
|
'DT_RPATH' of a shared library are searched for shared
|
|
|
libraries needed by it. The 'DT_RPATH' entries are ignored if
|
|
|
'DT_RUNPATH' entries exist.
|
|
|
7. The default directories, normally '/lib' and '/usr/lib'.
|
|
|
8. For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file
|
|
|
'/etc/ld.so.conf' exists, the list of directories found in
|
|
|
that file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue
|
|
|
a warning and continue with the link.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-shared'
|
|
|
'-Bshareable'
|
|
|
Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF,
|
|
|
XCOFF and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically
|
|
|
create a shared library if the '-e' option is not used and there
|
|
|
are undefined symbols in the link.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--sort-common'
|
|
|
'--sort-common=ascending'
|
|
|
'--sort-common=descending'
|
|
|
This option tells 'ld' to sort the common symbols by alignment in
|
|
|
ascending or descending order when it places them in the
|
|
|
appropriate output sections. The symbol alignments considered are
|
|
|
sixteen-byte or larger, eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and
|
|
|
one-byte. This is to prevent gaps between symbols due to alignment
|
|
|
constraints. If no sorting order is specified, then descending
|
|
|
order is assumed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--sort-section=name'
|
|
|
This option will apply 'SORT_BY_NAME' to all wildcard section
|
|
|
patterns in the linker script.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--sort-section=alignment'
|
|
|
This option will apply 'SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' to all wildcard section
|
|
|
patterns in the linker script.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--spare-dynamic-tags=COUNT'
|
|
|
This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
|
|
|
.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed
|
|
|
by post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--split-by-file[=SIZE]'
|
|
|
Similar to '--split-by-reloc' but creates a new output section for
|
|
|
each input file when SIZE is reached. SIZE defaults to a size of 1
|
|
|
if not given.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--split-by-reloc[=COUNT]'
|
|
|
Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no
|
|
|
single output section in the file contains more than COUNT
|
|
|
relocations. This is useful when generating huge relocatable files
|
|
|
for downloading into certain real time kernels with the COFF object
|
|
|
file format; since COFF cannot represent more than 65535
|
|
|
relocations in a single section. Note that this will fail to work
|
|
|
with object file formats which do not support arbitrary sections.
|
|
|
The linker will not split up individual input sections for
|
|
|
redistribution, so if a single input section contains more than
|
|
|
COUNT relocations one output section will contain that many
|
|
|
relocations. COUNT defaults to a value of 32768.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--stats'
|
|
|
Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker,
|
|
|
such as execution time and memory usage.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--sysroot=DIRECTORY'
|
|
|
Use DIRECTORY as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
|
|
|
configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
|
|
|
that were configured using '--with-sysroot'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--task-link'
|
|
|
This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked
|
|
|
object file where all of the global symbols have been converted to
|
|
|
statics.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--traditional-format'
|
|
|
For some targets, the output of 'ld' is different in some ways from
|
|
|
the output of some existing linker. This switch requests 'ld' to
|
|
|
use the traditional format instead.
|
|
|
|
|
|
For example, on SunOS, 'ld' combines duplicate entries in the
|
|
|
symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file
|
|
|
with full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately,
|
|
|
the SunOS 'dbx' program can not read the resulting program ('gdb'
|
|
|
has no trouble). The '--traditional-format' switch tells 'ld' to
|
|
|
not combine duplicate entries.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--section-start=SECTIONNAME=ORG'
|
|
|
Locate a section in the output file at the absolute address given
|
|
|
by ORG. You may use this option as many times as necessary to
|
|
|
locate multiple sections in the command line. ORG must be a single
|
|
|
hexadecimal integer; for compatibility with other linkers, you may
|
|
|
omit the leading '0x' usually associated with hexadecimal values.
|
|
|
_Note:_ there should be no white space between SECTIONNAME, the
|
|
|
equals sign ("<=>"), and ORG.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-Tbss=ORG'
|
|
|
'-Tdata=ORG'
|
|
|
'-Ttext=ORG'
|
|
|
Same as '--section-start', with '.bss', '.data' or '.text' as the
|
|
|
SECTIONNAME.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-Ttext-segment=ORG'
|
|
|
When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the
|
|
|
first byte of the text segment.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-Trodata-segment=ORG'
|
|
|
When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
|
|
|
the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the
|
|
|
executable text, it will set the address of the first byte of the
|
|
|
read-only data segment.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'-Tldata-segment=ORG'
|
|
|
When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium
|
|
|
memory model, it will set the address of the first byte of the
|
|
|
ldata segment.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--unresolved-symbols=METHOD'
|
|
|
Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four
|
|
|
possible values for 'method':
|
|
|
|
|
|
'ignore-all'
|
|
|
Do not report any unresolved symbols.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'report-all'
|
|
|
Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'ignore-in-object-files'
|
|
|
Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared
|
|
|
libraries, but ignore them if they come from regular object
|
|
|
files.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'ignore-in-shared-libs'
|
|
|
Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files,
|
|
|
but ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can
|
|
|
be useful when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that
|
|
|
all the shared libraries that it should be referencing are
|
|
|
included on the linker's command line.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be
|
|
|
controlled by the '--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined' option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Normally the linker will generate an error message for each
|
|
|
reported unresolved symbol but the option
|
|
|
'--warn-unresolved-symbols' can change this to a warning.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--dll-verbose'
|
|
|
'--verbose[=NUMBER]'
|
|
|
Display the version number for 'ld' and list the linker emulations
|
|
|
supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened.
|
|
|
Display the linker script being used by the linker. If the
|
|
|
optional NUMBER argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be
|
|
|
displayed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--version-script=VERSION-SCRIPTFILE'
|
|
|
Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is
|
|
|
typically used when creating shared libraries to specify additional
|
|
|
information about the version hierarchy for the library being
|
|
|
created. This option is only fully supported on ELF platforms
|
|
|
which support shared libraries; see *note VERSION::. It is
|
|
|
partially supported on PE platforms, which can use version scripts
|
|
|
to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any symbols marked
|
|
|
'local' in the version script will not be exported. *Note WIN32::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--warn-common'
|
|
|
Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or
|
|
|
with a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy
|
|
|
practice, but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This
|
|
|
option allows you to find potential problems from combining global
|
|
|
symbols. Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you
|
|
|
may get some warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in
|
|
|
your programs.
|
|
|
|
|
|
There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C
|
|
|
examples:
|
|
|
|
|
|
'int i = 1;'
|
|
|
A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of
|
|
|
the output file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'extern int i;'
|
|
|
An undefined reference, which does not allocate space. There
|
|
|
must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
|
|
|
variable somewhere.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'int i;'
|
|
|
A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common
|
|
|
symbols for a variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area
|
|
|
of the output file. The linker merges multiple common symbols
|
|
|
for the same variable into a single symbol. If they are of
|
|
|
different sizes, it picks the largest size. The linker turns
|
|
|
a common symbol into a declaration, if there is a definition
|
|
|
of the same variable.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--warn-common' option can produce five kinds of warnings.
|
|
|
Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the
|
|
|
symbol just encountered, and the second describes the previous
|
|
|
symbol encountered with the same name. One or both of the two
|
|
|
symbols will be a common symbol.
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is
|
|
|
already a definition for the symbol.
|
|
|
FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
|
|
|
overridden by definition
|
|
|
FILE(SECTION): warning: defined here
|
|
|
|
|
|
2. Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later
|
|
|
definition for the symbol is encountered. This is the same as
|
|
|
the previous case, except that the symbols are encountered in
|
|
|
a different order.
|
|
|
FILE(SECTION): warning: definition of `SYMBOL'
|
|
|
overriding common
|
|
|
FILE(SECTION): warning: common is here
|
|
|
|
|
|
3. Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common
|
|
|
symbol.
|
|
|
FILE(SECTION): warning: multiple common
|
|
|
of `SYMBOL'
|
|
|
FILE(SECTION): warning: previous common is here
|
|
|
|
|
|
4. Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
|
|
|
FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
|
|
|
overridden by larger common
|
|
|
FILE(SECTION): warning: larger common is here
|
|
|
|
|
|
5. Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol.
|
|
|
This is the same as the previous case, except that the symbols
|
|
|
are encountered in a different order.
|
|
|
FILE(SECTION): warning: common of `SYMBOL'
|
|
|
overriding smaller common
|
|
|
FILE(SECTION): warning: smaller common is here
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--warn-constructors'
|
|
|
Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for
|
|
|
a few object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the
|
|
|
linker can not detect the use of global constructors.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--warn-multiple-gp'
|
|
|
Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output
|
|
|
file. This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the
|
|
|
Alpha. Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in
|
|
|
a special section. A special register (the global pointer) points
|
|
|
into the middle of this section, so that constants can be loaded
|
|
|
efficiently via a base-register relative addressing mode. Since
|
|
|
the offset in base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively
|
|
|
small (e.g., 16 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant
|
|
|
pool. Thus, in large programs, it is often necessary to use
|
|
|
multiple global pointer values in order to be able to address all
|
|
|
possible constants. This option causes a warning to be issued
|
|
|
whenever this case occurs.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--warn-once'
|
|
|
Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per
|
|
|
module which refers to it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--warn-section-align'
|
|
|
Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
|
|
|
alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input
|
|
|
section. The address will only be changed if it not explicitly
|
|
|
specified; that is, if the 'SECTIONS' command does not specify a
|
|
|
start address for the section (*note SECTIONS::).
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--warn-shared-textrel'
|
|
|
Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--warn-alternate-em'
|
|
|
Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--warn-unresolved-symbols'
|
|
|
If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the
|
|
|
option '--unresolved-symbols') it will normally generate an error.
|
|
|
This option makes it generate a warning instead.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--error-unresolved-symbols'
|
|
|
This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors
|
|
|
when it is reporting unresolved symbols.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--whole-archive'
|
|
|
For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
|
|
|
'--whole-archive' option, include every object file in the archive
|
|
|
in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required
|
|
|
object files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a
|
|
|
shared library, forcing every object to be included in the
|
|
|
resulting shared library. This option may be used more than once.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
|
|
|
about this option, so you have to use '-Wl,-whole-archive'.
|
|
|
Second, don't forget to use '-Wl,-no-whole-archive' after your list
|
|
|
of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to your
|
|
|
link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--wrap=SYMBOL'
|
|
|
Use a wrapper function for SYMBOL. Any undefined reference to
|
|
|
SYMBOL will be resolved to '__wrap_SYMBOL'. Any undefined
|
|
|
reference to '__real_SYMBOL' will be resolved to SYMBOL.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
|
|
|
wrapper function should be called '__wrap_SYMBOL'. If it wishes to
|
|
|
call the system function, it should call '__real_SYMBOL'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here is a trivial example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
void *
|
|
|
__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
|
|
|
return __real_malloc (c);
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you link other code with this file using '--wrap malloc', then
|
|
|
all calls to 'malloc' will call the function '__wrap_malloc'
|
|
|
instead. The call to '__real_malloc' in '__wrap_malloc' will call
|
|
|
the real 'malloc' function.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may wish to provide a '__real_malloc' function as well, so that
|
|
|
links without the '--wrap' option will succeed. If you do this,
|
|
|
you should not put the definition of '__real_malloc' in the same
|
|
|
file as '__wrap_malloc'; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
|
|
|
call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to 'malloc'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So,
|
|
|
translation unit internal references to SYMBOL are not resolved to
|
|
|
'__wrap_SYMBOL'. In the next example, the call to 'f' in 'g' is
|
|
|
not resolved to '__wrap_f'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
int
|
|
|
f (void)
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
return 123;
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
int
|
|
|
g (void)
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
return f();
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--eh-frame-hdr'
|
|
|
'--no-eh-frame-hdr'
|
|
|
Request ('--eh-frame-hdr') or suppress ('--no-eh-frame-hdr') the
|
|
|
creation of '.eh_frame_hdr' section and ELF 'PT_GNU_EH_FRAME'
|
|
|
segment header.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--no-ld-generated-unwind-info'
|
|
|
Request creation of '.eh_frame' unwind info for linker generated
|
|
|
code sections like PLT. This option is on by default if linker
|
|
|
generated unwind info is supported.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--enable-new-dtags'
|
|
|
'--disable-new-dtags'
|
|
|
This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older
|
|
|
ELF systems may not understand them. If you specify
|
|
|
'--enable-new-dtags', the new dynamic tags will be created as
|
|
|
needed and older dynamic tags will be omitted. If you specify
|
|
|
'--disable-new-dtags', no new dynamic tags will be created. By
|
|
|
default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that those
|
|
|
options are only available for ELF systems.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--hash-size=NUMBER'
|
|
|
Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
|
|
|
close to NUMBER. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
|
|
|
time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
|
|
|
increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing
|
|
|
this value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of
|
|
|
speed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--hash-style=STYLE'
|
|
|
Set the type of linker's hash table(s). STYLE can be either 'sysv'
|
|
|
for classic ELF '.hash' section, 'gnu' for new style GNU
|
|
|
'.gnu.hash' section or 'both' for both the classic ELF '.hash' and
|
|
|
new style GNU '.gnu.hash' hash tables. The default depends upon
|
|
|
how the linker was configured, but for most Linux based systems it
|
|
|
will be 'both'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--compress-debug-sections=none'
|
|
|
'--compress-debug-sections=zlib'
|
|
|
'--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu'
|
|
|
'--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi'
|
|
|
On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections
|
|
|
are compressed using zlib.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--compress-debug-sections=none' doesn't compress DWARF debug
|
|
|
sections. '--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu' compresses DWARF
|
|
|
debug sections and renames them to begin with '.zdebug' instead of
|
|
|
'.debug'. '--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi' also compresses
|
|
|
DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it sets the
|
|
|
SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--compress-debug-sections=zlib' option is an alias for
|
|
|
'--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
|
|
|
sections, so if a binary is linked with
|
|
|
'--compress-debug-sections=none' for example, then any compressed
|
|
|
debug sections in input files will be uncompressed before they are
|
|
|
copied into the output binary.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
|
|
|
involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain.
|
|
|
The default can be determined by examining the output from the
|
|
|
linker's '--help' option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--reduce-memory-overheads'
|
|
|
This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the
|
|
|
expense of linking speed. This was introduced to select the old
|
|
|
O(n^2) algorithm for link map file generation, rather than the new
|
|
|
O(n) algorithm which uses about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size
|
|
|
to 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the
|
|
|
linker's run time. This is not done however if the '--hash-size'
|
|
|
switch has been used.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--reduce-memory-overheads' switch may be also be used to
|
|
|
enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--build-id'
|
|
|
'--build-id=STYLE'
|
|
|
Request the creation of a '.note.gnu.build-id' ELF note section or
|
|
|
a '.buildid' COFF section. The contents of the note are unique
|
|
|
bits identifying this linked file. STYLE can be 'uuid' to use 128
|
|
|
random bits, 'sha1' to use a 160-bit SHA1 hash on the normative
|
|
|
parts of the output contents, 'md5' to use a 128-bit MD5 hash on
|
|
|
the normative parts of the output contents, or '0xHEXSTRING' to use
|
|
|
a chosen bit string specified as an even number of hexadecimal
|
|
|
digits ('-' and ':' characters between digit pairs are ignored).
|
|
|
If STYLE is omitted, 'sha1' is used.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The 'md5' and 'sha1' styles produces an identifier that is always
|
|
|
the same in an identical output file, but will be unique among all
|
|
|
nonidentical output files. It is not intended to be compared as a
|
|
|
checksum for the file's contents. A linked file may be changed
|
|
|
later by other tools, but the build ID bit string identifying the
|
|
|
original linked file does not change.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Passing 'none' for STYLE disables the setting from any '--build-id'
|
|
|
options earlier on the command line.
|
|
|
|
|
|
2.1.1 Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
|
|
|
-----------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
The i386 PE linker supports the '-shared' option, which causes the
|
|
|
output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a normal
|
|
|
executable. You should name the output '*.dll' when you use this
|
|
|
option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard '*.def'
|
|
|
files, which may be specified on the linker command line like an object
|
|
|
file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports symbols from, to
|
|
|
ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal object file).
|
|
|
|
|
|
In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
|
|
|
support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386 PE
|
|
|
target. Options that take values may be separated from their values by
|
|
|
either a space or an equals sign.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--add-stdcall-alias'
|
|
|
If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@NN) will be exported
|
|
|
as-is and also with the suffix stripped. [This option is specific
|
|
|
to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--base-file FILE'
|
|
|
Use FILE as the name of a file in which to save the base addresses
|
|
|
of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with 'dlltool'.
|
|
|
[This is an i386 PE specific option]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--dll'
|
|
|
Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
|
|
|
'-shared' or specify a 'LIBRARY' in a given '.def' file. [This
|
|
|
option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--enable-long-section-names'
|
|
|
'--disable-long-section-names'
|
|
|
The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that
|
|
|
permits the use of section names longer than eight characters, the
|
|
|
normal limit for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in
|
|
|
object files, as fully-linked executable images do not carry the
|
|
|
COFF string table required to support the longer names. As a GNU
|
|
|
extension, it is possible to allow their use in executable images
|
|
|
as well, or to (probably pointlessly!) disallow it in object
|
|
|
files, by using these two options. Executable images generated
|
|
|
with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
|
|
|
as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when
|
|
|
examined with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and
|
|
|
dumpers. However, GDB relies on the use of PE long section names
|
|
|
to find Dwarf-2 debug information sections in an executable image
|
|
|
at runtime, and so if neither option is specified on the
|
|
|
command-line, 'ld' will enable long section names, overriding the
|
|
|
default and technically correct behaviour, when it finds the
|
|
|
presence of debug information while linking an executable image and
|
|
|
not stripping symbols. [This option is valid for all PE targeted
|
|
|
ports of the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--enable-stdcall-fixup'
|
|
|
'--disable-stdcall-fixup'
|
|
|
If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt
|
|
|
to do "fuzzy linking" by looking for another defined symbol that
|
|
|
differs only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall)
|
|
|
and will resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example,
|
|
|
the undefined symbol '_foo' might be linked to the function
|
|
|
'_foo@12', or the undefined symbol '_bar@16' might be linked to the
|
|
|
function '_bar'. When the linker does this, it prints a warning,
|
|
|
since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes import
|
|
|
libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature to
|
|
|
be usable. If you specify '--enable-stdcall-fixup', this feature
|
|
|
is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
|
|
|
'--disable-stdcall-fixup', this feature is disabled and such
|
|
|
mismatches are considered to be errors. [This option is specific
|
|
|
to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--leading-underscore'
|
|
|
'--no-leading-underscore'
|
|
|
For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is
|
|
|
defined in target's description. By this option it is possible to
|
|
|
disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--export-all-symbols'
|
|
|
If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL
|
|
|
will be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
|
|
|
otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
|
|
|
explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via
|
|
|
function attributes, the default is to not export anything else
|
|
|
unless this option is given. Note that the symbols 'DllMain@12',
|
|
|
'DllEntryPoint@0', 'DllMainCRTStartup@12', and 'impure_ptr' will
|
|
|
not be automatically exported. Also, symbols imported from other
|
|
|
DLLs will not be re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's
|
|
|
internal layout such as those beginning with '_head_' or ending
|
|
|
with '_iname'. In addition, no symbols from 'libgcc', 'libstd++',
|
|
|
'libmingw32', or 'crtX.o' will be exported. Symbols whose names
|
|
|
begin with '__rtti_' or '__builtin_' will not be exported, to help
|
|
|
with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an extensive list of
|
|
|
cygwin-private symbols that are not exported (obviously, this
|
|
|
applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets). These
|
|
|
cygwin-excludes are: '_cygwin_dll_entry@12',
|
|
|
'_cygwin_crt0_common@8', '_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@12',
|
|
|
'_fmode', '_impure_ptr', 'cygwin_attach_dll', 'cygwin_premain0',
|
|
|
'cygwin_premain1', 'cygwin_premain2', 'cygwin_premain3', and
|
|
|
'environ'. [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
|
|
|
of the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--exclude-symbols SYMBOL,SYMBOL,...'
|
|
|
Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
|
|
|
exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
|
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
|
|
linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--exclude-all-symbols'
|
|
|
Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported. [This
|
|
|
option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--file-alignment'
|
|
|
Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin
|
|
|
at file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults
|
|
|
to 512. [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
|
|
|
the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--heap RESERVE'
|
|
|
'--heap RESERVE,COMMIT'
|
|
|
Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally
|
|
|
commit) to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB
|
|
|
reserved, 4K committed. [This option is specific to the i386 PE
|
|
|
targeted port of the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--image-base VALUE'
|
|
|
Use VALUE as the base address of your program or dll. This is the
|
|
|
lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
|
|
|
is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance
|
|
|
of your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not
|
|
|
overlap any other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables,
|
|
|
and 0x10000000 for dlls. [This option is specific to the i386 PE
|
|
|
targeted port of the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--kill-at'
|
|
|
If given, the stdcall suffixes (@NN) will be stripped from symbols
|
|
|
before they are exported. [This option is specific to the i386 PE
|
|
|
targeted port of the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--large-address-aware'
|
|
|
If given, the appropriate bit in the "Characteristics" field of the
|
|
|
COFF header is set to indicate that this executable supports
|
|
|
virtual addresses greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in
|
|
|
conjunction with the /3GB or /USERVA=VALUE megabytes switch in the
|
|
|
"[operating systems]" section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit
|
|
|
has no effect. [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of
|
|
|
the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--disable-large-address-aware'
|
|
|
Reverts the effect of a previous '--large-address-aware' option.
|
|
|
This is useful if '--large-address-aware' is always set by the
|
|
|
compiler driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not
|
|
|
support virtual addresses greater than 2 gigabytes. [This option
|
|
|
is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--major-image-version VALUE'
|
|
|
Sets the major number of the "image version". Defaults to 1.
|
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
|
|
linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--major-os-version VALUE'
|
|
|
Sets the major number of the "os version". Defaults to 4. [This
|
|
|
option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--major-subsystem-version VALUE'
|
|
|
Sets the major number of the "subsystem version". Defaults to 4.
|
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
|
|
linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--minor-image-version VALUE'
|
|
|
Sets the minor number of the "image version". Defaults to 0.
|
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
|
|
linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--minor-os-version VALUE'
|
|
|
Sets the minor number of the "os version". Defaults to 0. [This
|
|
|
option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--minor-subsystem-version VALUE'
|
|
|
Sets the minor number of the "subsystem version". Defaults to 0.
|
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
|
|
linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--output-def FILE'
|
|
|
The linker will create the file FILE which will contain a DEF file
|
|
|
corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
|
|
|
(which should be called '*.def') may be used to create an import
|
|
|
library with 'dlltool' or may be used as a reference to
|
|
|
automatically or implicitly exported symbols. [This option is
|
|
|
specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--enable-auto-image-base'
|
|
|
'--enable-auto-image-base=VALUE'
|
|
|
Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting
|
|
|
with base VALUE, unless one is specified using the '--image-base'
|
|
|
argument. By using a hash generated from the dllname to create
|
|
|
unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory collisions and
|
|
|
relocations which can delay program execution are avoided. [This
|
|
|
option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--disable-auto-image-base'
|
|
|
Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
|
|
|
user-specified image base ('--image-base') then use the platform
|
|
|
default. [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
|
|
|
the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--dll-search-prefix STRING'
|
|
|
When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library, search
|
|
|
for '<string><basename>.dll' in preference to 'lib<basename>.dll'.
|
|
|
This behaviour allows easy distinction between DLLs built for the
|
|
|
various "subplatforms": native, cygwin, uwin, pw, etc. For
|
|
|
instance, cygwin DLLs typically use '--dll-search-prefix=cyg'.
|
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
|
|
linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--enable-auto-import'
|
|
|
Do sophisticated linking of '_symbol' to '__imp__symbol' for DATA
|
|
|
imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
|
|
|
mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
|
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
|
|
linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
|
|
|
feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text
|
|
|
section of the image file to be made writable. This does not
|
|
|
conform to the PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
|
|
|
data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
|
|
|
placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
|
|
|
around a problem with consts that is described here:
|
|
|
http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
|
|
|
|
|
|
Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' - but sometimes you
|
|
|
may see this message:
|
|
|
|
|
|
"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
|
|
|
documentation for ld's '--enable-auto-import' for details."
|
|
|
|
|
|
This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
|
|
|
ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables
|
|
|
only allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses
|
|
|
to member fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well
|
|
|
as using a constant index into an array variable imported from a
|
|
|
DLL. Any multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may
|
|
|
trigger this error condition. However, regardless of the exact
|
|
|
data type of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect
|
|
|
it, issue the warning, and exit.
|
|
|
|
|
|
There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of
|
|
|
the data type of the exported variable:
|
|
|
|
|
|
One way is to use -enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves
|
|
|
the task of adjusting references in your client code for runtime
|
|
|
environment, so this method works only when runtime environment
|
|
|
supports this feature.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a
|
|
|
variable - that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time.
|
|
|
For arrays, there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the
|
|
|
array's address) a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a
|
|
|
variable. Thus:
|
|
|
|
|
|
extern type extern_array[];
|
|
|
extern_array[1] -->
|
|
|
{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] }
|
|
|
|
|
|
or
|
|
|
|
|
|
extern type extern_array[];
|
|
|
extern_array[1] -->
|
|
|
{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] }
|
|
|
|
|
|
For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
|
|
|
is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...)
|
|
|
variable:
|
|
|
|
|
|
extern struct s extern_struct;
|
|
|
extern_struct.field -->
|
|
|
{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field }
|
|
|
|
|
|
or
|
|
|
|
|
|
extern long long extern_ll;
|
|
|
extern_ll -->
|
|
|
{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll }
|
|
|
|
|
|
A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
|
|
|
'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
|
|
|
'__declspec(dllimport)'. However, in practice that requires using
|
|
|
compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are building a DLL,
|
|
|
building client code that will link to the DLL, or merely
|
|
|
building/linking to a static library. In making the choice between
|
|
|
the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with constant
|
|
|
offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Original:
|
|
|
--foo.h
|
|
|
extern int arr[];
|
|
|
--foo.c
|
|
|
#include "foo.h"
|
|
|
void main(int argc, char **argv){
|
|
|
printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
Solution 1:
|
|
|
--foo.h
|
|
|
extern int arr[];
|
|
|
--foo.c
|
|
|
#include "foo.h"
|
|
|
void main(int argc, char **argv){
|
|
|
/* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
|
|
|
volatile int *parr = arr;
|
|
|
printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
Solution 2:
|
|
|
--foo.h
|
|
|
/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
|
|
|
#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
|
|
|
!(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
|
|
|
#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
|
|
|
#else
|
|
|
#define FOO_IMPORT
|
|
|
#endif
|
|
|
extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
|
|
|
--foo.c
|
|
|
#include "foo.h"
|
|
|
void main(int argc, char **argv){
|
|
|
printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your library to
|
|
|
use a functional interface rather than a data interface for the
|
|
|
offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
|
|
|
functions).
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--disable-auto-import'
|
|
|
Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of '_symbol' to
|
|
|
'__imp__symbol' for DATA imports from DLLs. [This option is
|
|
|
specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
|
|
|
If your code contains expressions described in -enable-auto-import
|
|
|
section, that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this
|
|
|
switch will create a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which
|
|
|
can be used by runtime environment to adjust references to such
|
|
|
data in your client code. [This option is specific to the i386 PE
|
|
|
targeted port of the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc'
|
|
|
Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports
|
|
|
from DLLs. [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port
|
|
|
of the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--enable-extra-pe-debug'
|
|
|
Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
|
|
|
[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the
|
|
|
linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--section-alignment'
|
|
|
Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin
|
|
|
at addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to
|
|
|
0x1000. [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of
|
|
|
the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--stack RESERVE'
|
|
|
'--stack RESERVE,COMMIT'
|
|
|
Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally
|
|
|
commit) to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB
|
|
|
reserved, 4K committed. [This option is specific to the i386 PE
|
|
|
targeted port of the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--subsystem WHICH'
|
|
|
'--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR'
|
|
|
'--subsystem WHICH:MAJOR.MINOR'
|
|
|
Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
|
|
|
legal values for WHICH are 'native', 'windows', 'console', 'posix',
|
|
|
and 'xbox'. You may optionally set the subsystem version also.
|
|
|
Numeric values are also accepted for WHICH. [This option is
|
|
|
specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following options set flags in the 'DllCharacteristics' field
|
|
|
of the PE file header: [These options are specific to PE targeted
|
|
|
ports of the linker]
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--high-entropy-va'
|
|
|
Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
|
|
|
(ASLR). This option also implies '--dynamicbase' and
|
|
|
'--enable-reloc-section'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--dynamicbase'
|
|
|
The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
|
|
|
randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
|
|
|
Vista for i386 PE targets. This option also implies
|
|
|
'--enable-reloc-section'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--forceinteg'
|
|
|
Code integrity checks are enforced.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--nxcompat'
|
|
|
The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention. This
|
|
|
feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--no-isolation'
|
|
|
Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--no-seh'
|
|
|
The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from this
|
|
|
image.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--no-bind'
|
|
|
Do not bind this image.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--wdmdriver'
|
|
|
The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--tsaware'
|
|
|
The image is Terminal Server aware.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--insert-timestamp'
|
|
|
'--no-insert-timestamp'
|
|
|
Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default
|
|
|
behaviour as it matches legacy code and it means that the image
|
|
|
will work with other, proprietary tools. The problem with this
|
|
|
default is that it will result in slightly different images being
|
|
|
produced each time the same sources are linked. The option
|
|
|
'--no-insert-timestamp' can be used to insert a zero value for the
|
|
|
timestamp, this ensuring that binaries produced from identical
|
|
|
sources will compare identically.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--enable-reloc-section'
|
|
|
Create the base relocation table, which is necessary if the image
|
|
|
is loaded at a different image base than specified in the PE
|
|
|
header.
|
|
|
|
|
|
2.1.2 Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
|
|
|
---------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support
|
|
|
shared libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a
|
|
|
unique index; all executables use an index of 0.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--dsbt-size SIZE'
|
|
|
This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current
|
|
|
executable or shared library to SIZE. The default is to create a
|
|
|
table with 64 entries.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--dsbt-index INDEX'
|
|
|
This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared
|
|
|
library to INDEX. The default is 0, which is appropriate for
|
|
|
generating executables. If a shared library is generated with a
|
|
|
DSBT index of 0, the 'R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX' relocs are copied into
|
|
|
the output file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--no-merge-exidx-entries' switch disables the merging of
|
|
|
adjacent exidx entries in frame unwind info.
|
|
|
|
|
|
2.1.3 Options specific to C-SKY targets
|
|
|
---------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--branch-stub'
|
|
|
This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch
|
|
|
stub sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This
|
|
|
option is usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call
|
|
|
instructions that can access the full memory range and branch
|
|
|
relaxation is normally handled by the compiler or assembler.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--stub-group-size=N'
|
|
|
This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
|
|
|
It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can be
|
|
|
handled by one stub section. A negative value of N locates stub
|
|
|
sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
|
|
|
sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
|
|
|
'1' or '-1' indicate that the linker should choose suitable
|
|
|
defaults.
|
|
|
|
|
|
2.1.4 Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
|
|
|
------------------------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
|
|
|
memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--no-trampoline'
|
|
|
This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a
|
|
|
trampoline is generated for each far function which is called using
|
|
|
a 'jsr' instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function
|
|
|
is taken).
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--bank-window NAME'
|
|
|
This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region
|
|
|
in the 'MEMORY' specification that describes the memory bank
|
|
|
window. The definition of such region is then used by the linker
|
|
|
to compute paging and addresses within the memory window.
|
|
|
|
|
|
2.1.5 Options specific to Motorola 68K target
|
|
|
---------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following options are supported to control handling of GOT
|
|
|
generation when linking for 68K targets.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--got=TYPE'
|
|
|
This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
|
|
|
TYPE should be one of 'single', 'negative', 'multigot' or 'target'.
|
|
|
For more information refer to the Info entry for 'ld'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
2.1.6 Options specific to MIPS targets
|
|
|
--------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
|
|
|
generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
|
|
|
linking for MIPS targets.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--insn32'
|
|
|
'--no-insn32'
|
|
|
These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in
|
|
|
code generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy
|
|
|
binding stubs, or in relaxation. If '--insn32' is used, then the
|
|
|
linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if
|
|
|
'--no-insn32' is used, all instruction encodings are used,
|
|
|
including 16-bit ones where possible.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--ignore-branch-isa'
|
|
|
'--no-ignore-branch-isa'
|
|
|
These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
|
|
|
transitions. If '--ignore-branch-isa' is used, then the linker
|
|
|
accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
|
|
|
is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of 'BAL'
|
|
|
instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
|
|
|
equivalent 'JALX' instructions as the associated relocation is
|
|
|
calculated. By default or if '--no-ignore-branch-isa' is used a
|
|
|
check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
|
|
|
an error.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--compact-branches'
|
|
|
'--compact-branches'
|
|
|
These options control the generation of compact instructions by the
|
|
|
linker in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Environment, Prev: Options, Up: Invocation
|
|
|
|
|
|
2.2 Environment Variables
|
|
|
=========================
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can change the behaviour of 'ld' with the environment variables
|
|
|
'GNUTARGET', 'LDEMULATION' and 'COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'GNUTARGET' determines the input-file object format if you don't use
|
|
|
'-b' (or its synonym '--format'). Its value should be one of the BFD
|
|
|
names for an input format (*note BFD::). If there is no 'GNUTARGET' in
|
|
|
the environment, 'ld' uses the natural format of the target. If
|
|
|
'GNUTARGET' is set to 'default' then BFD attempts to discover the input
|
|
|
format by examining binary input files; this method often succeeds, but
|
|
|
there are potential ambiguities, since there is no method of ensuring
|
|
|
that the magic number used to specify object-file formats is unique.
|
|
|
However, the configuration procedure for BFD on each system places the
|
|
|
conventional format for that system first in the search-list, so
|
|
|
ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'LDEMULATION' determines the default emulation if you don't use the
|
|
|
'-m' option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
|
|
|
behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
|
|
|
available emulations with the '--verbose' or '-V' options. If the '-m'
|
|
|
option is not used, and the 'LDEMULATION' environment variable is not
|
|
|
defined, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
|
|
|
configured.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
|
|
|
'COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE' is set in the environment, then it will default to
|
|
|
not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in a similar
|
|
|
fashion by the 'gcc' linker wrapper program. The default may be
|
|
|
overridden by the '--demangle' and '--no-demangle' options.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Scripts, Next: Machine Dependent, Prev: Invocation, Up: Top
|
|
|
|
|
|
3 Linker Scripts
|
|
|
****************
|
|
|
|
|
|
Every link is controlled by a "linker script". This script is written
|
|
|
in the linker command language.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections
|
|
|
in the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
|
|
|
the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
|
|
|
more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
|
|
|
direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
|
|
|
described below.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
|
|
|
yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
|
|
|
linker executable. You can use the '--verbose' command-line option to
|
|
|
display the default linker script. Certain command-line options, such
|
|
|
as '-r' or '-N', will affect the default linker script.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may supply your own linker script by using the '-T' command line
|
|
|
option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the default
|
|
|
linker script.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input
|
|
|
files to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. *Note
|
|
|
Implicit Linker Scripts::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Menu:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
|
|
|
* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
|
|
|
* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
|
|
|
* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
|
|
|
* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
|
|
|
* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
|
|
|
* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
|
|
|
* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
|
|
|
* VERSION:: VERSION Command
|
|
|
* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
|
|
|
* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Basic Script Concepts, Next: Script Format, Up: Scripts
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.1 Basic Linker Script Concepts
|
|
|
================================
|
|
|
|
|
|
We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
|
|
|
describe the linker script language.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The linker combines input files into a single output file. The
|
|
|
output file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
|
|
|
"object file format". Each file is called an "object file". The output
|
|
|
file is often called an "executable", but for our purposes we will also
|
|
|
call it an object file. Each object file has, among other things, a
|
|
|
list of "sections". We sometimes refer to a section in an input file as
|
|
|
an "input section"; similarly, a section in the output file is an
|
|
|
"output section".
|
|
|
|
|
|
Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
|
|
|
also have an associated block of data, known as the "section contents".
|
|
|
A section may be marked as "loadable", which means that the contents
|
|
|
should be loaded into memory when the output file is run. A section
|
|
|
with no contents may be "allocatable", which means that an area in
|
|
|
memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be loaded
|
|
|
there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section which
|
|
|
is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort of
|
|
|
debugging information.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
|
|
|
first is the "VMA", or virtual memory address. This is the address the
|
|
|
section will have when the output file is run. The second is the "LMA",
|
|
|
or load memory address. This is the address at which the section will
|
|
|
be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the same. An
|
|
|
example of when they might be different is when a data section is loaded
|
|
|
into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up (this
|
|
|
technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM based
|
|
|
system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the RAM
|
|
|
address would be the VMA.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can see the sections in an object file by using the 'objdump'
|
|
|
program with the '-h' option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Every object file also has a list of "symbols", known as the "symbol
|
|
|
table". A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol has a name,
|
|
|
and each defined symbol has an address, among other information. If you
|
|
|
compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you will get a defined
|
|
|
symbol for every defined function and global or static variable. Every
|
|
|
undefined function or global variable which is referenced in the input
|
|
|
file will become an undefined symbol.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can see the symbols in an object file by using the 'nm' program,
|
|
|
or by using the 'objdump' program with the '-t' option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Script Format, Next: Simple Example, Prev: Basic Script Concepts, Up: Scripts
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.2 Linker Script Format
|
|
|
========================
|
|
|
|
|
|
Linker scripts are text files.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
|
|
|
either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
|
|
|
symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
|
|
|
generally ignored.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered
|
|
|
directly. If the file name contains a character such as a comma which
|
|
|
would otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name
|
|
|
in double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
|
|
|
file name.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
|
|
|
'/*' and '*/'. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent to
|
|
|
whitespace.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Simple Example, Next: Simple Commands, Prev: Script Format, Up: Scripts
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.3 Simple Linker Script Example
|
|
|
================================
|
|
|
|
|
|
Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The simplest possible linker script has just one command: 'SECTIONS'.
|
|
|
You use the 'SECTIONS' command to describe the memory layout of the
|
|
|
output file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The 'SECTIONS' command is a powerful command. Here we will describe
|
|
|
a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of code,
|
|
|
initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the '.text',
|
|
|
'.data', and '.bss' sections, respectively. Let's assume further that
|
|
|
these are the only sections which appear in your input files.
|
|
|
|
|
|
For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
|
|
|
0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
|
|
|
linker script which will do that:
|
|
|
SECTIONS
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
. = 0x10000;
|
|
|
.text : { *(.text) }
|
|
|
. = 0x8000000;
|
|
|
.data : { *(.data) }
|
|
|
.bss : { *(.bss) }
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
You write the 'SECTIONS' command as the keyword 'SECTIONS', followed
|
|
|
by a series of symbol assignments and output section descriptions
|
|
|
enclosed in curly braces.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The first line inside the 'SECTIONS' command of the above example
|
|
|
sets the value of the special symbol '.', which is the location counter.
|
|
|
If you do not specify the address of an output section in some other way
|
|
|
(other ways are described later), the address is set from the current
|
|
|
value of the location counter. The location counter is then incremented
|
|
|
by the size of the output section. At the start of the 'SECTIONS'
|
|
|
command, the location counter has the value '0'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The second line defines an output section, '.text'. The colon is
|
|
|
required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
|
|
|
after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
|
|
|
which should be placed into this output section. The '*' is a wildcard
|
|
|
which matches any file name. The expression '*(.text)' means all
|
|
|
'.text' input sections in all input files.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Since the location counter is '0x10000' when the output section
|
|
|
'.text' is defined, the linker will set the address of the '.text'
|
|
|
section in the output file to be '0x10000'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The remaining lines define the '.data' and '.bss' sections in the
|
|
|
output file. The linker will place the '.data' output section at
|
|
|
address '0x8000000'. After the linker places the '.data' output
|
|
|
section, the value of the location counter will be '0x8000000' plus the
|
|
|
size of the '.data' output section. The effect is that the linker will
|
|
|
place the '.bss' output section immediately after the '.data' output
|
|
|
section in memory.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
|
|
|
alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
|
|
|
example, the specified addresses for the '.text' and '.data' sections
|
|
|
will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker may have
|
|
|
to create a small gap between the '.data' and '.bss' sections.
|
|
|
|
|
|
That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Simple Commands, Next: Assignments, Prev: Simple Example, Up: Scripts
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.4 Simple Linker Script Commands
|
|
|
=================================
|
|
|
|
|
|
In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Menu:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
|
|
|
* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
|
|
|
* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
|
|
|
|
|
|
* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
|
|
|
* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Entry Point, Next: File Commands, Up: Simple Commands
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.4.1 Setting the Entry Point
|
|
|
-----------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
The first instruction to execute in a program is called the "entry
|
|
|
point". You can use the 'ENTRY' linker script command to set the entry
|
|
|
point. The argument is a symbol name:
|
|
|
ENTRY(SYMBOL)
|
|
|
|
|
|
There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set
|
|
|
the entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
|
|
|
stopping when one of them succeeds:
|
|
|
* the '-e' ENTRY command-line option;
|
|
|
* the 'ENTRY(SYMBOL)' command in a linker script;
|
|
|
* the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
|
|
|
targets this is 'start', but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
|
|
|
check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one
|
|
|
found.
|
|
|
* the address of the first byte of the '.text' section, if present;
|
|
|
* The address '0'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: File Commands, Next: Format Commands, Prev: Entry Point, Up: Simple Commands
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.4.2 Commands Dealing with Files
|
|
|
---------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
Several linker script commands deal with files.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'INCLUDE FILENAME'
|
|
|
Include the linker script FILENAME at this point. The file will be
|
|
|
searched for in the current directory, and in any directory
|
|
|
specified with the '-L' option. You can nest calls to 'INCLUDE' up
|
|
|
to 10 levels deep.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can place 'INCLUDE' directives at the top level, in 'MEMORY' or
|
|
|
'SECTIONS' commands, or in output section descriptions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'INPUT(FILE, FILE, ...)'
|
|
|
'INPUT(FILE FILE ...)'
|
|
|
The 'INPUT' command directs the linker to include the named files
|
|
|
in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
|
|
|
|
|
|
For example, if you always want to include 'subr.o' any time you do
|
|
|
a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command
|
|
|
line, then you can put 'INPUT (subr.o)' in your linker script.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the
|
|
|
linker script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a '-T'
|
|
|
option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In case a "sysroot prefix" is configured, and the filename starts
|
|
|
with the '/' character, and the script being processed was located
|
|
|
inside the "sysroot prefix", the filename will be looked for in the
|
|
|
"sysroot prefix". Otherwise, the linker will try to open the file
|
|
|
in the current directory. If it is not found, the linker will
|
|
|
search through the archive library search path. The "sysroot
|
|
|
prefix" can also be forced by specifying '=' as the first character
|
|
|
in the filename path, or prefixing the filename path with
|
|
|
'$SYSROOT'. See also the description of '-L' in *note Command-line
|
|
|
Options: Options.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you use 'INPUT (-lFILE)', 'ld' will transform the name to
|
|
|
'libFILE.a', as with the command-line argument '-l'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When you use the 'INPUT' command in an implicit linker script, the
|
|
|
files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
|
|
|
script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'GROUP(FILE, FILE, ...)'
|
|
|
'GROUP(FILE FILE ...)'
|
|
|
The 'GROUP' command is like 'INPUT', except that the named files
|
|
|
should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
|
|
|
new undefined references are created. See the description of '-('
|
|
|
in *note Command-line Options: Options.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'AS_NEEDED(FILE, FILE, ...)'
|
|
|
'AS_NEEDED(FILE FILE ...)'
|
|
|
This construct can appear only inside of the 'INPUT' or 'GROUP'
|
|
|
commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
|
|
|
as if they appear directly in the 'INPUT' or 'GROUP' commands, with
|
|
|
the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only when
|
|
|
they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
|
|
|
'--as-needed' option for all the files listed inside of it and
|
|
|
restores previous '--as-needed' resp. '--no-as-needed' setting
|
|
|
afterwards.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'OUTPUT(FILENAME)'
|
|
|
The 'OUTPUT' command names the output file. Using
|
|
|
'OUTPUT(FILENAME)' in the linker script is exactly like using '-o
|
|
|
FILENAME' on the command line (*note Command Line Options:
|
|
|
Options.). If both are used, the command-line option takes
|
|
|
precedence.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can use the 'OUTPUT' command to define a default name for the
|
|
|
output file other than the usual default of 'a.out'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'SEARCH_DIR(PATH)'
|
|
|
The 'SEARCH_DIR' command adds PATH to the list of paths where 'ld'
|
|
|
looks for archive libraries. Using 'SEARCH_DIR(PATH)' is exactly
|
|
|
like using '-L PATH' on the command line (*note Command-line
|
|
|
Options: Options.). If both are used, then the linker will search
|
|
|
both paths. Paths specified using the command-line option are
|
|
|
searched first.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'STARTUP(FILENAME)'
|
|
|
The 'STARTUP' command is just like the 'INPUT' command, except that
|
|
|
FILENAME will become the first input file to be linked, as though
|
|
|
it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
|
|
|
when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of
|
|
|
the first file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Format Commands, Next: REGION_ALIAS, Prev: File Commands, Up: Simple Commands
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.4.3 Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
|
|
|
-----------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)'
|
|
|
'OUTPUT_FORMAT(DEFAULT, BIG, LITTLE)'
|
|
|
The 'OUTPUT_FORMAT' command names the BFD format to use for the
|
|
|
output file (*note BFD::). Using 'OUTPUT_FORMAT(BFDNAME)' is
|
|
|
exactly like using '--oformat BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
|
|
|
Command-line Options: Options.). If both are used, the command
|
|
|
line option takes precedence.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can use 'OUTPUT_FORMAT' with three arguments to use different
|
|
|
formats based on the '-EB' and '-EL' command-line options. This
|
|
|
permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
|
|
|
desired endianness.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If neither '-EB' nor '-EL' are used, then the output format will be
|
|
|
the first argument, DEFAULT. If '-EB' is used, the output format
|
|
|
will be the second argument, BIG. If '-EL' is used, the output
|
|
|
format will be the third argument, LITTLE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses
|
|
|
this command:
|
|
|
OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
|
|
|
This says that the default format for the output file is
|
|
|
'elf32-bigmips', but if the user uses the '-EL' command-line
|
|
|
option, the output file will be created in the 'elf32-littlemips'
|
|
|
format.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'TARGET(BFDNAME)'
|
|
|
The 'TARGET' command names the BFD format to use when reading input
|
|
|
files. It affects subsequent 'INPUT' and 'GROUP' commands. This
|
|
|
command is like using '-b BFDNAME' on the command line (*note
|
|
|
Command-line Options: Options.). If the 'TARGET' command is used
|
|
|
but 'OUTPUT_FORMAT' is not, then the last 'TARGET' command is also
|
|
|
used to set the format for the output file. *Note BFD::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: REGION_ALIAS, Next: Miscellaneous Commands, Prev: Format Commands, Up: Simple Commands
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.4.4 Assign alias names to memory regions
|
|
|
------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
|
|
|
*note MEMORY:: command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory
|
|
|
region.
|
|
|
|
|
|
REGION_ALIAS(ALIAS, REGION)
|
|
|
|
|
|
The 'REGION_ALIAS' function creates an alias name ALIAS for the
|
|
|
memory region REGION. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
|
|
|
to memory regions. An example follows.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with
|
|
|
various memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile
|
|
|
memory 'RAM' that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have
|
|
|
a read-only, non-volatile memory 'ROM' that allows code execution and
|
|
|
read-only data access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile
|
|
|
memory 'ROM2' with read-only data access and no code execution
|
|
|
capability. We have four output sections:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* '.text' program code;
|
|
|
* '.rodata' read-only data;
|
|
|
* '.data' read-write initialized data;
|
|
|
* '.bss' read-write zero initialized data.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system
|
|
|
independent part defining the output sections and a system dependent
|
|
|
part mapping the output sections to the memory regions available on the
|
|
|
system. Our embedded systems come with three different memory setups
|
|
|
'A', 'B' and 'C':
|
|
|
Section Variant A Variant B Variant C
|
|
|
.text RAM ROM ROM
|
|
|
.rodata RAM ROM ROM2
|
|
|
.data RAM RAM/ROM RAM/ROM2
|
|
|
.bss RAM RAM RAM
|
|
|
The notation 'RAM/ROM' or 'RAM/ROM2' means that this section is
|
|
|
loaded into region 'ROM' or 'ROM2' respectively. Please note that the
|
|
|
load address of the '.data' section starts in all three variants at the
|
|
|
end of the '.rodata' section.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows.
|
|
|
It includes the system dependent 'linkcmds.memory' file that describes
|
|
|
the memory layout:
|
|
|
INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
|
|
|
|
|
|
SECTIONS
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
.text :
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
*(.text)
|
|
|
} > REGION_TEXT
|
|
|
.rodata :
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
*(.rodata)
|
|
|
rodata_end = .;
|
|
|
} > REGION_RODATA
|
|
|
.data : AT (rodata_end)
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
data_start = .;
|
|
|
*(.data)
|
|
|
} > REGION_DATA
|
|
|
data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
|
|
|
data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
|
|
|
.bss :
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
*(.bss)
|
|
|
} > REGION_BSS
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
Now we need three different 'linkcmds.memory' files to define memory
|
|
|
regions and alias names. The content of 'linkcmds.memory' for the three
|
|
|
variants 'A', 'B' and 'C':
|
|
|
'A'
|
|
|
Here everything goes into the 'RAM'.
|
|
|
MEMORY
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
|
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
|
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
|
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
|
|
|
'B'
|
|
|
Program code and read-only data go into the 'ROM'. Read-write data
|
|
|
goes into the 'RAM'. An image of the initialized data is loaded
|
|
|
into the 'ROM' and will be copied during system start into the
|
|
|
'RAM'.
|
|
|
MEMORY
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
|
|
|
RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
|
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
|
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
|
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
|
|
|
'C'
|
|
|
Program code goes into the 'ROM'. Read-only data goes into the
|
|
|
'ROM2'. Read-write data goes into the 'RAM'. An image of the
|
|
|
initialized data is loaded into the 'ROM2' and will be copied
|
|
|
during system start into the 'RAM'.
|
|
|
MEMORY
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
|
|
|
ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
|
|
|
RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
|
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
|
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
|
|
|
REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
|
|
|
|
|
|
It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to
|
|
|
copy the '.data' section from 'ROM' or 'ROM2' into the 'RAM' if
|
|
|
necessary:
|
|
|
#include <string.h>
|
|
|
|
|
|
extern char data_start [];
|
|
|
extern char data_size [];
|
|
|
extern char data_load_start [];
|
|
|
|
|
|
void copy_data(void)
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
if (data_start != data_load_start)
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Miscellaneous Commands, Prev: REGION_ALIAS, Up: Simple Commands
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.4.5 Other Linker Script Commands
|
|
|
----------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
There are a few other linker scripts commands.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'ASSERT(EXP, MESSAGE)'
|
|
|
Ensure that EXP is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
|
|
|
with an error code, and print MESSAGE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
|
|
|
take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
|
|
|
inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
|
|
|
for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
|
|
|
symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
|
|
|
|
|
|
.stack :
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
PROVIDE (__stack = .);
|
|
|
PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
|
|
|
ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
will fail if '__stack_size' is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
|
|
|
PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so
|
|
|
they can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
|
|
|
|
|
|
PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
|
|
|
.stack :
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
PROVIDE (__stack = .);
|
|
|
ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
will work.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'EXTERN(SYMBOL SYMBOL ...)'
|
|
|
Force SYMBOL to be entered in the output file as an undefined
|
|
|
symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
|
|
|
modules from standard libraries. You may list several SYMBOLs for
|
|
|
each 'EXTERN', and you may use 'EXTERN' multiple times. This
|
|
|
command has the same effect as the '-u' command-line option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
|
|
|
This command has the same effect as the '-d' command-line option:
|
|
|
to make 'ld' assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
|
|
|
output file is specified ('-r').
|
|
|
|
|
|
'INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION'
|
|
|
This command has the same effect as the '--no-define-common'
|
|
|
command-line option: to make 'ld' omit the assignment of addresses
|
|
|
to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION'
|
|
|
This command has the same effect as the '--force-group-allocation'
|
|
|
command-line option: to make 'ld' place section group members like
|
|
|
normal input sections, and to delete the section groups even if a
|
|
|
relocatable output file is specified ('-r').
|
|
|
|
|
|
'INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] OUTPUT_SECTION'
|
|
|
This command is typically used in a script specified by '-T' to
|
|
|
augment the default 'SECTIONS' with, for example, overlays. It
|
|
|
inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
|
|
|
OUTPUT_SECTION, and also causes '-T' to not override the default
|
|
|
linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
|
|
|
sections. *Note Location Counter::. The insertion happens after
|
|
|
the linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to
|
|
|
the insertion, since '-T' scripts are parsed before the default
|
|
|
linker script, statements in the '-T' script occur before the
|
|
|
default linker script statements in the internal linker
|
|
|
representation of the script. In particular, input section
|
|
|
assignments will be made to '-T' output sections before those in
|
|
|
the default script. Here is an example of how a '-T' script using
|
|
|
'INSERT' might look:
|
|
|
|
|
|
SECTIONS
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
OVERLAY :
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
.ov1 { ov1*(.text) }
|
|
|
.ov2 { ov2*(.text) }
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
INSERT AFTER .text;
|
|
|
|
|
|
'NOCROSSREFS(SECTION SECTION ...)'
|
|
|
This command may be used to tell 'ld' to issue an error about any
|
|
|
references among certain output sections.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
|
|
|
using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another
|
|
|
section will not be. Any direct references between the two
|
|
|
sections would be errors. For example, it would be an error if
|
|
|
code in one section called a function defined in the other section.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The 'NOCROSSREFS' command takes a list of output section names. If
|
|
|
'ld' detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
|
|
|
an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
|
|
|
'NOCROSSREFS' command uses output section names, not input section
|
|
|
names.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'NOCROSSREFS_TO(TOSECTION FROMSECTION ...)'
|
|
|
This command may be used to tell 'ld' to issue an error about any
|
|
|
references to one section from a list of other sections.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The 'NOCROSSREFS' command is useful when ensuring that two or more
|
|
|
output sections are entirely independent but there are situations
|
|
|
where a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core
|
|
|
application there may be shared code that can be called from each
|
|
|
core but for safety must never call back.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The 'NOCROSSREFS_TO' command takes a list of output section names.
|
|
|
The first section can not be referenced from any of the other
|
|
|
sections. If 'ld' detects any references to the first section from
|
|
|
any of the other sections, it reports an error and returns a
|
|
|
non-zero exit status. Note that the 'NOCROSSREFS_TO' command uses
|
|
|
output section names, not input section names.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'OUTPUT_ARCH(BFDARCH)'
|
|
|
Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is
|
|
|
one of the names used by the BFD library (*note BFD::). You can
|
|
|
see the architecture of an object file by using the 'objdump'
|
|
|
program with the '-f' option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'LD_FEATURE(STRING)'
|
|
|
This command may be used to modify 'ld' behavior. If STRING is
|
|
|
'"SANE_EXPR"' then absolute symbols and numbers in a script are
|
|
|
simply treated as numbers everywhere. *Note Expression Section::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Assignments, Next: SECTIONS, Prev: Simple Commands, Up: Scripts
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.5 Assigning Values to Symbols
|
|
|
===============================
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
|
|
|
the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Menu:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
|
|
|
* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
|
|
|
* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
|
|
|
* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
|
|
|
* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Simple Assignments, Next: HIDDEN, Up: Assignments
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.5.1 Simple Assignments
|
|
|
------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
|
|
|
|
|
|
'SYMBOL = EXPRESSION ;'
|
|
|
'SYMBOL += EXPRESSION ;'
|
|
|
'SYMBOL -= EXPRESSION ;'
|
|
|
'SYMBOL *= EXPRESSION ;'
|
|
|
'SYMBOL /= EXPRESSION ;'
|
|
|
'SYMBOL <<= EXPRESSION ;'
|
|
|
'SYMBOL >>= EXPRESSION ;'
|
|
|
'SYMBOL &= EXPRESSION ;'
|
|
|
'SYMBOL |= EXPRESSION ;'
|
|
|
|
|
|
The first case will define SYMBOL to the value of EXPRESSION. In the
|
|
|
other cases, SYMBOL must already be defined, and the value will be
|
|
|
adjusted accordingly.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The special symbol name '.' indicates the location counter. You may
|
|
|
only use this within a 'SECTIONS' command. *Note Location Counter::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The semicolon after EXPRESSION is required.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Expressions are defined below; see *note Expressions::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or
|
|
|
as statements within a 'SECTIONS' command, or as part of an output
|
|
|
section description in a 'SECTIONS' command.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
|
|
|
expression; for more information, see *note Expression Section::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
|
|
|
assignments may be used:
|
|
|
|
|
|
floating_point = 0;
|
|
|
SECTIONS
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
.text :
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
*(.text)
|
|
|
_etext = .;
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
|
|
|
.data : { *(.data) }
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
In this example, the symbol 'floating_point' will be defined as zero.
|
|
|
The symbol '_etext' will be defined as the address following the last
|
|
|
'.text' input section. The symbol '_bdata' will be defined as the
|
|
|
address following the '.text' output section aligned upward to a 4 byte
|
|
|
boundary.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: HIDDEN, Next: PROVIDE, Prev: Simple Assignments, Up: Assignments
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.5.2 HIDDEN
|
|
|
------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
|
|
|
exported. The syntax is 'HIDDEN(SYMBOL = EXPRESSION)'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here is the example from *note Simple Assignments::, rewritten to use
|
|
|
'HIDDEN':
|
|
|
|
|
|
HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
|
|
|
SECTIONS
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
.text :
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
*(.text)
|
|
|
HIDDEN(_etext = .);
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
|
|
|
.data : { *(.data) }
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this
|
|
|
module.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: PROVIDE, Next: PROVIDE_HIDDEN, Prev: HIDDEN, Up: Assignments
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.5.3 PROVIDE
|
|
|
-------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
|
|
|
only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
|
|
|
the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol 'etext'.
|
|
|
However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use 'etext' as a
|
|
|
function name without encountering an error. The 'PROVIDE' keyword may
|
|
|
be used to define a symbol, such as 'etext', only if it is referenced
|
|
|
but not defined. The syntax is 'PROVIDE(SYMBOL = EXPRESSION)'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here is an example of using 'PROVIDE' to define 'etext':
|
|
|
SECTIONS
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
.text :
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
*(.text)
|
|
|
_etext = .;
|
|
|
PROVIDE(etext = .);
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
In this example, if the program defines '_etext' (with a leading
|
|
|
underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
|
|
|
the other hand, the program defines 'etext' (with no leading
|
|
|
underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
|
|
|
If the program references 'etext' but does not define it, the linker
|
|
|
will use the definition in the linker script.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note - the 'PROVIDE' directive considers a common symbol to be
|
|
|
defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
|
|
|
that the 'PROVIDE' would create. This is particularly important when
|
|
|
considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
|
|
|
'__CTOR_LIST__' as these are often defined as common symbols.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: PROVIDE_HIDDEN, Next: Source Code Reference, Prev: PROVIDE, Up: Assignments
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.5.4 PROVIDE_HIDDEN
|
|
|
--------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
Similar to 'PROVIDE'. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be hidden
|
|
|
and won't be exported.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Source Code Reference, Prev: PROVIDE_HIDDEN, Up: Assignments
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.5.5 Source Code Reference
|
|
|
---------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
|
|
|
intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to a
|
|
|
variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a symbol
|
|
|
that does not have a value.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
|
|
|
transform names in the source code into different names when they are
|
|
|
stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
|
|
|
prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive 'name
|
|
|
mangling'. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name of a
|
|
|
variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same variable
|
|
|
as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a linker script
|
|
|
variable might be referred to as:
|
|
|
|
|
|
extern int foo;
|
|
|
|
|
|
But in the linker script it might be defined as:
|
|
|
|
|
|
_foo = 1000;
|
|
|
|
|
|
In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
|
|
|
transformation has taken place.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
|
|
|
things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space in
|
|
|
the program's memory to hold the _value_ of the symbol. The second is
|
|
|
that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol table which
|
|
|
holds the symbol's _address_. ie the symbol table contains the address
|
|
|
of the block of memory holding the symbol's value. So for example the
|
|
|
following C declaration, at file scope:
|
|
|
|
|
|
int foo = 1000;
|
|
|
|
|
|
creates an entry called 'foo' in the symbol table. This entry holds
|
|
|
the address of an 'int' sized block of memory where the number 1000 is
|
|
|
initially stored.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
|
|
|
first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
|
|
|
memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
|
|
|
So:
|
|
|
|
|
|
foo = 1;
|
|
|
|
|
|
looks up the symbol 'foo' in the symbol table, gets the address
|
|
|
associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
|
|
|
address. Whereas:
|
|
|
|
|
|
int * a = & foo;
|
|
|
|
|
|
looks up the symbol 'foo' in the symbol table, gets its address and
|
|
|
then copies this address into the block of memory associated with the
|
|
|
variable 'a'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
|
|
|
the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are an
|
|
|
address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
|
|
|
|
|
|
foo = 1000;
|
|
|
|
|
|
creates an entry in the symbol table called 'foo' which holds the
|
|
|
address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
|
|
|
address 1000. This means that you cannot access the _value_ of a linker
|
|
|
script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is access the
|
|
|
_address_ of a linker script defined symbol.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source
|
|
|
code you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt
|
|
|
to use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of
|
|
|
a section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
|
|
|
linker script contains these declarations:
|
|
|
|
|
|
start_of_ROM = .ROM;
|
|
|
end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
|
|
|
start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
|
|
|
|
|
|
Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
|
|
|
|
|
|
extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
|
|
|
|
|
|
memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note the use of the '&' operators. These are correct. Alternatively
|
|
|
the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or arrays and then
|
|
|
the code will again work as expected:
|
|
|
|
|
|
extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
|
|
|
|
|
|
memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note how using this method does not require the use of '&' operators.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: SECTIONS, Next: MEMORY, Prev: Assignments, Up: Scripts
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.6 SECTIONS Command
|
|
|
====================
|
|
|
|
|
|
The 'SECTIONS' command tells the linker how to map input sections into
|
|
|
output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The format of the 'SECTIONS' command is:
|
|
|
SECTIONS
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
SECTIONS-COMMAND
|
|
|
SECTIONS-COMMAND
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
Each SECTIONS-COMMAND may of be one of the following:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* an 'ENTRY' command (*note Entry command: Entry Point.)
|
|
|
* a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
|
|
|
* an output section description
|
|
|
* an overlay description
|
|
|
|
|
|
The 'ENTRY' command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
|
|
|
'SECTIONS' command for convenience in using the location counter in
|
|
|
those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
|
|
|
understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
|
|
|
the layout of the output file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
|
|
|
below.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you do not use a 'SECTIONS' command in your linker script, the
|
|
|
linker will place each input section into an identically named output
|
|
|
section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
|
|
|
input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
|
|
|
example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
|
|
|
in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Menu:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Output Section Description:: Output section description
|
|
|
* Output Section Name:: Output section name
|
|
|
* Output Section Address:: Output section address
|
|
|
* Input Section:: Input section description
|
|
|
* Output Section Data:: Output section data
|
|
|
* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
|
|
|
* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
|
|
|
* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
|
|
|
* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Description, Next: Output Section Name, Up: SECTIONS
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.6.1 Output Section Description
|
|
|
--------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
The full description of an output section looks like this:
|
|
|
SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
|
|
|
[AT(LMA)]
|
|
|
[ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
|
|
|
[SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
|
|
|
[CONSTRAINT]
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
|
|
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
} [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP] [,]
|
|
|
|
|
|
Most output sections do not use most of the optional section
|
|
|
attributes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The whitespace around SECTION is required, so that the section name
|
|
|
is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required. The
|
|
|
comma at the end may be required if a FILLEXP is used and the next
|
|
|
SECTIONS-COMMAND looks like a continuation of the expression. The line
|
|
|
breaks and other white space are optional.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Each OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND may be one of the following:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* a symbol assignment (*note Assignments::)
|
|
|
* an input section description (*note Input Section::)
|
|
|
* data values to include directly (*note Output Section Data::)
|
|
|
* a special output section keyword (*note Output Section Keywords::)
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Name, Next: Output Section Address, Prev: Output Section Description, Up: SECTIONS
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.6.2 Output Section Name
|
|
|
-------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
The name of the output section is SECTION. SECTION must meet the
|
|
|
constraints of your output format. In formats which only support a
|
|
|
limited number of sections, such as 'a.out', the name must be one of the
|
|
|
names supported by the format ('a.out', for example, allows only
|
|
|
'.text', '.data' or '.bss'). If the output format supports any number
|
|
|
of sections, but with numbers and not names (as is the case for Oasys),
|
|
|
the name should be supplied as a quoted numeric string. A section name
|
|
|
may consist of any sequence of characters, but a name which contains any
|
|
|
unusual characters such as commas must be quoted.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The output section name '/DISCARD/' is special; *note Output Section
|
|
|
Discarding::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Address, Next: Input Section, Prev: Output Section Name, Up: SECTIONS
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.6.3 Output Section Address
|
|
|
----------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
The ADDRESS is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory address) of
|
|
|
the output section. This address is optional, but if it is provided
|
|
|
then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for
|
|
|
the section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be
|
|
|
adjusted to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
|
|
|
alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
|
|
|
contained within the output section.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The output section address heuristic is as follows:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* If an output memory REGION is set for the section then it is added
|
|
|
to this region and its address will be the next free address in
|
|
|
that region.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
|
|
|
regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with
|
|
|
the section is selected to contain it. The section's output
|
|
|
address will be the next free address in that region; *note
|
|
|
MEMORY::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
|
|
|
the output address will be based on the current value of the
|
|
|
location counter.
|
|
|
|
|
|
For example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
.text . : { *(.text) }
|
|
|
|
|
|
and
|
|
|
|
|
|
.text : { *(.text) }
|
|
|
|
|
|
are subtly different. The first will set the address of the '.text'
|
|
|
output section to the current value of the location counter. The second
|
|
|
will set it to the current value of the location counter aligned to the
|
|
|
strictest alignment of any of the '.text' input sections.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The ADDRESS may be an arbitrary expression; *note Expressions::. For
|
|
|
example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary, so
|
|
|
that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could do
|
|
|
something like this:
|
|
|
.text ALIGN(0x10) : { *(.text) }
|
|
|
This works because 'ALIGN' returns the current location counter aligned
|
|
|
upward to the specified value.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Specifying ADDRESS for a section will change the value of the
|
|
|
location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
|
|
|
sections are ignored).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Input Section, Next: Output Section Data, Prev: Output Section Address, Up: SECTIONS
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.6.4 Input Section Description
|
|
|
-------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
The most common output section command is an input section description.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The input section description is the most basic linker script
|
|
|
operation. You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out
|
|
|
your program in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the
|
|
|
linker how to map the input files into your memory layout.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Menu:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
|
|
|
* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
|
|
|
* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
|
|
|
* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
|
|
|
* Input Section Example:: Input section example
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Input Section Basics, Next: Input Section Wildcards, Up: Input Section
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.6.4.1 Input Section Basics
|
|
|
............................
|
|
|
|
|
|
An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
|
|
|
by a list of section names in parentheses.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
|
|
|
describe further below (*note Input Section Wildcards::).
|
|
|
|
|
|
The most common input section description is to include all input
|
|
|
sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
|
|
|
include all input '.text' sections, you would write:
|
|
|
*(.text)
|
|
|
Here the '*' is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a
|
|
|
list of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be
|
|
|
used to match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE
|
|
|
list. For example:
|
|
|
EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
|
|
|
will cause all .ctors sections from all files except 'crtend.o' and
|
|
|
'otherfile.o' to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be placed
|
|
|
inside the section list, for example:
|
|
|
*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
|
|
|
The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
|
|
|
two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
|
|
|
more than one section, as described below.
|
|
|
|
|
|
There are two ways to include more than one section:
|
|
|
*(.text .rdata)
|
|
|
*(.text) *(.rdata)
|
|
|
The difference between these is the order in which the '.text' and
|
|
|
'.rdata' input sections will appear in the output section. In the first
|
|
|
example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as they
|
|
|
are found in the linker input. In the second example, all '.text' input
|
|
|
sections will appear first, followed by all '.rdata' input sections.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
|
|
|
is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
|
|
|
immediately following section, for example:
|
|
|
*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
|
|
|
will cause all '.text' sections from all files except 'somefile.o' to be
|
|
|
included, while all '.rdata' sections from all files, including
|
|
|
'somefile.o', will be included. To exclude the '.rdata' sections from
|
|
|
'somefile.o' the example could be modified to:
|
|
|
*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
|
|
|
Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
|
|
|
before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
|
|
|
all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
|
|
|
EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular
|
|
|
file. You would do this if one or more of your files contain special
|
|
|
data that needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
|
|
|
data.o(.data)
|
|
|
|
|
|
To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
|
|
|
of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF
|
|
|
sections:
|
|
|
|
|
|
SECTIONS {
|
|
|
.text : { INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) }
|
|
|
.text2 : { INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) }
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
In this example, the output section '.text' will be comprised of any
|
|
|
input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
|
|
|
'SHF_MERGE' and 'SHF_STRINGS' are set. The output section '.text2' will
|
|
|
be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text) whose
|
|
|
section header flag 'SHF_WRITE' is clear.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
|
|
|
matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file, with
|
|
|
no whitespace around the colon.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'archive:file'
|
|
|
matches file within archive
|
|
|
'archive:'
|
|
|
matches the whole archive
|
|
|
':file'
|
|
|
matches file but not one in an archive
|
|
|
|
|
|
Either one or both of 'archive' and 'file' can contain shell
|
|
|
wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
|
|
|
single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so 'c:myfile.o'
|
|
|
is a simple file specification, not 'myfile.o' within an archive called
|
|
|
'c'. 'archive:file' filespecs may also be used within an 'EXCLUDE_FILE'
|
|
|
list, but may not appear in other linker script contexts. For instance,
|
|
|
you cannot extract a file from an archive by using 'archive:file' in an
|
|
|
'INPUT' command.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections
|
|
|
in the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
|
|
|
commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
|
|
|
data.o
|
|
|
|
|
|
When you use a file name which is not an 'archive:file' specifier and
|
|
|
does not contain any wild card characters, the linker will first see if
|
|
|
you also specified the file name on the linker command line or in an
|
|
|
'INPUT' command. If you did not, the linker will attempt to open the
|
|
|
file as an input file, as though it appeared on the command line. Note
|
|
|
that this differs from an 'INPUT' command, because the linker will not
|
|
|
search for the file in the archive search path.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Input Section Wildcards, Next: Input Section Common, Prev: Input Section Basics, Up: Input Section
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.6.4.2 Input Section Wildcard Patterns
|
|
|
.......................................
|
|
|
|
|
|
In an input section description, either the file name or the section
|
|
|
name or both may be wildcard patterns.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The file name of '*' seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
|
|
|
pattern for the file name.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'*'
|
|
|
matches any number of characters
|
|
|
'?'
|
|
|
matches any single character
|
|
|
'[CHARS]'
|
|
|
matches a single instance of any of the CHARS; the '-' character
|
|
|
may be used to specify a range of characters, as in '[a-z]' to
|
|
|
match any lower case letter
|
|
|
'\'
|
|
|
quotes the following character
|
|
|
|
|
|
When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
|
|
|
will not match a '/' character (used to separate directory names on
|
|
|
Unix). A pattern consisting of a single '*' character is an exception;
|
|
|
it will always match any file name, whether it contains a '/' or not.
|
|
|
In a section name, the wildcard characters will match a '/' character.
|
|
|
|
|
|
File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
|
|
|
specified on the command line or in an 'INPUT' command. The linker does
|
|
|
not search directories to expand wildcards.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file
|
|
|
name appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the
|
|
|
linker will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
|
|
|
sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
|
|
|
'data.o' rule will not be used:
|
|
|
.data : { *(.data) }
|
|
|
.data1 : { data.o(.data) }
|
|
|
|
|
|
Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by
|
|
|
wildcards in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can
|
|
|
change this by using the 'SORT_BY_NAME' keyword, which appears before a
|
|
|
wildcard pattern in parentheses (e.g., 'SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)'). When
|
|
|
the 'SORT_BY_NAME' keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or
|
|
|
sections into ascending order by name before placing them in the output
|
|
|
file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' is similar to 'SORT_BY_NAME'.
|
|
|
'SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' will sort sections into descending order of
|
|
|
alignment before placing them in the output file. Placing larger
|
|
|
alignments before smaller alignments can reduce the amount of padding
|
|
|
needed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY' is also similar to 'SORT_BY_NAME'.
|
|
|
'SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY' will sort sections into ascending numerical
|
|
|
order of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in the section name
|
|
|
before placing them in the output file. In '.init_array.NNNNN' and
|
|
|
'.fini_array.NNNNN', 'NNNNN' is the init_priority. In '.ctors.NNNNN'
|
|
|
and '.dtors.NNNNN', 'NNNNN' is 65535 minus the init_priority.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'SORT' is an alias for 'SORT_BY_NAME'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script,
|
|
|
there can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. 'SORT_BY_NAME' ('SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern)).
|
|
|
It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if
|
|
|
two sections have the same name.
|
|
|
2. 'SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' ('SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)).
|
|
|
It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if
|
|
|
two sections have the same alignment.
|
|
|
3. 'SORT_BY_NAME' ('SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern)) is
|
|
|
treated the same as 'SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern).
|
|
|
4. 'SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' ('SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section
|
|
|
pattern)) is treated the same as 'SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard
|
|
|
section pattern).
|
|
|
5. All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
|
|
|
section sorting command are used, section sorting command always takes
|
|
|
precedence over the command-line option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
|
|
|
command-line option will make the section sorting command to be treated
|
|
|
as nested sorting command.
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. 'SORT_BY_NAME' (wildcard section pattern ) with '--sort-sections
|
|
|
alignment' is equivalent to 'SORT_BY_NAME' ('SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT'
|
|
|
(wildcard section pattern)).
|
|
|
2. 'SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' (wildcard section pattern) with '--sort-section
|
|
|
name' is equivalent to 'SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT' ('SORT_BY_NAME'
|
|
|
(wildcard section pattern)).
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
|
|
|
command-line option will be ignored.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'SORT_NONE' disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
|
|
|
section sorting option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use
|
|
|
the '-M' linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
|
|
|
precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
|
|
|
files. This linker script directs the linker to place all '.text'
|
|
|
sections in '.text' and all '.bss' sections in '.bss'. The linker will
|
|
|
place the '.data' section from all files beginning with an upper case
|
|
|
character in '.DATA'; for all other files, the linker will place the
|
|
|
'.data' section in '.data'.
|
|
|
SECTIONS {
|
|
|
.text : { *(.text) }
|
|
|
.DATA : { [A-Z]*(.data) }
|
|
|
.data : { *(.data) }
|
|
|
.bss : { *(.bss) }
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Input Section Common, Next: Input Section Keep, Prev: Input Section Wildcards, Up: Input Section
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.6.4.3 Input Section for Common Symbols
|
|
|
........................................
|
|
|
|
|
|
A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
|
|
|
file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
|
|
|
linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
|
|
|
named 'COMMON'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may use file names with the 'COMMON' section just as with any
|
|
|
other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
|
|
|
particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
|
|
|
input files are placed in another section.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
|
|
|
'.bss' section in the output file. For example:
|
|
|
.bss { *(.bss) *(COMMON) }
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol.
|
|
|
For example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard
|
|
|
common symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will
|
|
|
use a different special section name for other types of common symbols.
|
|
|
In the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses 'COMMON' for standard common
|
|
|
symbols and '.scommon' for small common symbols. This permits you to
|
|
|
map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
|
|
|
locations.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You will sometimes see '[COMMON]' in old linker scripts. This
|
|
|
notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to '*(COMMON)'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Input Section Keep, Next: Input Section Example, Prev: Input Section Common, Up: Input Section
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.6.4.4 Input Section and Garbage Collection
|
|
|
............................................
|
|
|
|
|
|
When link-time garbage collection is in use ('--gc-sections'), it is
|
|
|
often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated. This is
|
|
|
accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry with
|
|
|
'KEEP()', as in 'KEEP(*(.init))' or 'KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Input Section Example, Prev: Input Section Keep, Up: Input Section
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.6.4.5 Input Section Example
|
|
|
.............................
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
|
|
|
to read all of the sections from file 'all.o' and place them at the
|
|
|
start of output section 'outputa' which starts at location '0x10000'.
|
|
|
All of section '.input1' from file 'foo.o' follows immediately, in the
|
|
|
same output section. All of section '.input2' from 'foo.o' goes into
|
|
|
output section 'outputb', followed by section '.input1' from 'foo1.o'.
|
|
|
All of the remaining '.input1' and '.input2' sections from any files are
|
|
|
written to output section 'outputc'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
SECTIONS {
|
|
|
outputa 0x10000 :
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
all.o
|
|
|
foo.o (.input1)
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
outputb :
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
foo.o (.input2)
|
|
|
foo1.o (.input1)
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
outputc :
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
*(.input1)
|
|
|
*(.input2)
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
|
|
|
and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
|
|
|
automatically *note PROVIDE:: two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
|
|
|
__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
|
|
|
indicate the start address and end address of the output section
|
|
|
respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as C
|
|
|
identifiers because they contain a '.' character.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Data, Next: Output Section Keywords, Prev: Input Section, Up: SECTIONS
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.6.5 Output Section Data
|
|
|
-------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
|
|
|
'BYTE', 'SHORT', 'LONG', 'QUAD', or 'SQUAD' as an output section
|
|
|
command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in parentheses
|
|
|
providing the value to store (*note Expressions::). The value of the
|
|
|
expression is stored at the current value of the location counter.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The 'BYTE', 'SHORT', 'LONG', and 'QUAD' commands store one, two,
|
|
|
four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the bytes, the
|
|
|
location counter is incremented by the number of bytes stored.
|
|
|
|
|
|
For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte
|
|
|
value of the symbol 'addr':
|
|
|
BYTE(1)
|
|
|
LONG(addr)
|
|
|
|
|
|
When using a 64 bit host or target, 'QUAD' and 'SQUAD' are the same;
|
|
|
they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and target
|
|
|
are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case 'QUAD'
|
|
|
stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and 'SQUAD' stores a 32
|
|
|
bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the object file format of the output file has an explicit
|
|
|
endianness, which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that
|
|
|
endianness. When the object file format does not have an explicit
|
|
|
endianness, as is true of, for example, S-records, the value will be
|
|
|
stored in the endianness of the first input object file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note--these commands only work inside a section description and not
|
|
|
between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
|
|
|
SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } LONG(1) .data : { *(.data) } }
|
|
|
whereas this will work:
|
|
|
SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) ; LONG(1) } .data : { *(.data) } }
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may use the 'FILL' command to set the fill pattern for the
|
|
|
current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
|
|
|
otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
|
|
|
gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
|
|
|
with the value of the expression, repeated as necessary. A 'FILL'
|
|
|
statement covers memory locations after the point at which it occurs in
|
|
|
the section definition; by including more than one 'FILL' statement, you
|
|
|
can have different fill patterns in different parts of an output
|
|
|
section.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
|
|
|
value '0x90':
|
|
|
FILL(0x90909090)
|
|
|
|
|
|
The 'FILL' command is similar to the '=FILLEXP' output section
|
|
|
attribute, but it only affects the part of the section following the
|
|
|
'FILL' command, rather than the entire section. If both are used, the
|
|
|
'FILL' command takes precedence. *Note Output Section Fill::, for
|
|
|
details on the fill expression.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Keywords, Next: Output Section Discarding, Prev: Output Section Data, Up: SECTIONS
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.6.6 Output Section Keywords
|
|
|
-----------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
|
|
|
commands.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS'
|
|
|
The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input
|
|
|
file. The name of each symbol will be the name of the
|
|
|
corresponding input file. The section of each symbol will be the
|
|
|
output section in which the 'CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS' command
|
|
|
appears.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
|
|
|
normally used for any other object file format.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'CONSTRUCTORS'
|
|
|
When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
|
|
|
unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
|
|
|
destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
|
|
|
arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
|
|
|
automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by
|
|
|
name. For these object file formats, the 'CONSTRUCTORS' command
|
|
|
tells the linker to place constructor information in the output
|
|
|
section where the 'CONSTRUCTORS' command appears. The
|
|
|
'CONSTRUCTORS' command is ignored for other object file formats.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The symbol '__CTOR_LIST__' marks the start of the global
|
|
|
constructors, and the symbol '__CTOR_END__' marks the end.
|
|
|
Similarly, '__DTOR_LIST__' and '__DTOR_END__' mark the start and
|
|
|
end of the global destructors. The first word in the list is the
|
|
|
number of entries, followed by the address of each constructor or
|
|
|
destructor, followed by a zero word. The compiler must arrange to
|
|
|
actually run the code. For these object file formats GNU C++
|
|
|
normally calls constructors from a subroutine '__main'; a call to
|
|
|
'__main' is automatically inserted into the startup code for
|
|
|
'main'. GNU C++ normally runs destructors either by using
|
|
|
'atexit', or directly from the function 'exit'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
For object file formats such as 'COFF' or 'ELF' which support
|
|
|
arbitrary section names, GNU C++ will normally arrange to put the
|
|
|
addresses of global constructors and destructors into the '.ctors'
|
|
|
and '.dtors' sections. Placing the following sequence into your
|
|
|
linker script will build the sort of table which the GNU C++
|
|
|
runtime code expects to see.
|
|
|
|
|
|
__CTOR_LIST__ = .;
|
|
|
LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
|
|
|
*(.ctors)
|
|
|
LONG(0)
|
|
|
__CTOR_END__ = .;
|
|
|
__DTOR_LIST__ = .;
|
|
|
LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
|
|
|
*(.dtors)
|
|
|
LONG(0)
|
|
|
__DTOR_END__ = .;
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you are using the GNU C++ support for initialization priority,
|
|
|
which provides some control over the order in which global
|
|
|
constructors are run, you must sort the constructors at link time
|
|
|
to ensure that they are executed in the correct order. When using
|
|
|
the 'CONSTRUCTORS' command, use 'SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)'
|
|
|
instead. When using the '.ctors' and '.dtors' sections, use
|
|
|
'*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))' and '*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))' instead of
|
|
|
just '*(.ctors)' and '*(.dtors)'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues
|
|
|
automatically, and you will not need to concern yourself with them.
|
|
|
However, you may need to consider this if you are using C++ and
|
|
|
writing your own linker scripts.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Discarding, Next: Output Section Attributes, Prev: Output Section Keywords, Up: SECTIONS
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.6.7 Output Section Discarding
|
|
|
-------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
|
|
|
This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may
|
|
|
not be present in any of the input files. For example:
|
|
|
.foo : { *(.foo) }
|
|
|
will only create a '.foo' section in the output file if there is a
|
|
|
'.foo' section in at least one input file, and if the input sections are
|
|
|
not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate space in an
|
|
|
output section will also create the output section. So too will
|
|
|
assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create space, except
|
|
|
for '. = 0', '. = . + 0', '. = sym', '. = . + sym' and '. = ALIGN (. !=
|
|
|
0, expr, 1)' when 'sym' is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the
|
|
|
script. This allows you to force output of an empty section with '. =
|
|
|
.'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The linker will ignore address assignments (*note Output Section
|
|
|
Address::) on discarded output sections, except when the linker script
|
|
|
defines symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will
|
|
|
obey the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
|
|
|
section is discarded.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The special output section name '/DISCARD/' may be used to discard
|
|
|
input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
|
|
|
section named '/DISCARD/' are not included in the output file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note, sections that match the '/DISCARD/' output section will be
|
|
|
discarded even if they are in an ELF section group which has other
|
|
|
members which are not being discarded. This is deliberate. Discarding
|
|
|
takes precedence over grouping.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Attributes, Next: Overlay Description, Prev: Output Section Discarding, Up: SECTIONS
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.6.8 Output Section Attributes
|
|
|
-------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
|
|
|
like this:
|
|
|
|
|
|
SECTION [ADDRESS] [(TYPE)] :
|
|
|
[AT(LMA)]
|
|
|
[ALIGN(SECTION_ALIGN) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
|
|
|
[SUBALIGN(SUBSECTION_ALIGN)]
|
|
|
[CONSTRAINT]
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
|
|
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
} [>REGION] [AT>LMA_REGION] [:PHDR :PHDR ...] [=FILLEXP]
|
|
|
|
|
|
We've already described SECTION, ADDRESS, and OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND.
|
|
|
In this section we will describe the remaining section attributes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Menu:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Output Section Type:: Output section type
|
|
|
* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
|
|
|
* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
|
|
|
* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
|
|
|
* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
|
|
|
* Output Section Region:: Output section region
|
|
|
* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
|
|
|
* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Type, Next: Output Section LMA, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.6.8.1 Output Section Type
|
|
|
...........................
|
|
|
|
|
|
Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
|
|
|
parentheses. The following types are defined:
|
|
|
|
|
|
'NOLOAD'
|
|
|
The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not
|
|
|
be loaded into memory when the program is run.
|
|
|
'DSECT'
|
|
|
'COPY'
|
|
|
'INFO'
|
|
|
'OVERLAY'
|
|
|
These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
|
|
|
rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
|
|
|
marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
|
|
|
section when the program is run.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
|
|
|
the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
|
|
|
the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the 'ROM'
|
|
|
section is addressed at memory location '0' and does not need to be
|
|
|
loaded when the program is run.
|
|
|
SECTIONS {
|
|
|
ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : { ... }
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section LMA, Next: Forced Output Alignment, Prev: Output Section Type, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.6.8.2 Output Section LMA
|
|
|
..........................
|
|
|
|
|
|
Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
|
|
|
*note Basic Script Concepts::. The virtual address is specified by the
|
|
|
*note Output Section Address:: described earlier. The load address is
|
|
|
specified by the 'AT' or 'AT>' keywords. Specifying a load address is
|
|
|
optional.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The 'AT' keyword takes an expression as an argument. This specifies
|
|
|
the exact load address of the section. The 'AT>' keyword takes the name
|
|
|
of a memory region as an argument. *Note MEMORY::. The load address of
|
|
|
the section is set to the next free address in the region, aligned to
|
|
|
the section's alignment requirements.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If neither 'AT' nor 'AT>' is specified for an allocatable section,
|
|
|
the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the load
|
|
|
address:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as the
|
|
|
LMA address as well.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible with
|
|
|
the current section, and this region contains at least one section,
|
|
|
then the LMA is set so the difference between the VMA and LMA is
|
|
|
the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of the last
|
|
|
section in the located region.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* If no memory regions have been declared then a default region that
|
|
|
covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
|
|
|
section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
|
|
|
example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
|
|
|
called '.text', which starts at '0x1000', one called '.mdata', which is
|
|
|
loaded at the end of the '.text' section even though its VMA is
|
|
|
'0x2000', and one called '.bss' to hold uninitialized data at address
|
|
|
'0x3000'. The symbol '_data' is defined with the value '0x2000', which
|
|
|
shows that the location counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
|
|
|
|
|
|
SECTIONS
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
.text 0x1000 : { *(.text) _etext = . ; }
|
|
|
.mdata 0x2000 :
|
|
|
AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
|
|
|
{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; }
|
|
|
.bss 0x3000 :
|
|
|
{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;}
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated
|
|
|
with this linker script would include something like the following, to
|
|
|
copy the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address.
|
|
|
Notice how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the
|
|
|
linker script.
|
|
|
|
|
|
extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
|
|
|
char *src = &_etext;
|
|
|
char *dst = &_data;
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
|
|
|
while (dst < &_edata)
|
|
|
*dst++ = *src++;
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* Zero bss. */
|
|
|
for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
|
|
|
*dst = 0;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Forced Output Alignment, Next: Forced Input Alignment, Prev: Output Section LMA, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.6.8.3 Forced Output Alignment
|
|
|
...............................
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
|
|
|
alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA
|
|
|
remains intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT
|
|
|
attribute.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Forced Input Alignment, Next: Output Section Constraint, Prev: Forced Output Alignment, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.6.8.4 Forced Input Alignment
|
|
|
..............................
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
|
|
|
SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
|
|
|
sections, whether larger or smaller.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Constraint, Next: Output Section Region, Prev: Forced Input Alignment, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.6.8.5 Output Section Constraint
|
|
|
.................................
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can specify that an output section should only be created if all of
|
|
|
its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
|
|
|
read-write by using the keyword 'ONLY_IF_RO' and 'ONLY_IF_RW'
|
|
|
respectively.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Region, Next: Output Section Phdr, Prev: Output Section Constraint, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.6.8.6 Output Section Region
|
|
|
.............................
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
|
|
|
using '>REGION'. *Note MEMORY::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here is a simple example:
|
|
|
MEMORY { rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 }
|
|
|
SECTIONS { ROM : { *(.text) } >rom }
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Phdr, Next: Output Section Fill, Prev: Output Section Region, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.6.8.7 Output Section Phdr
|
|
|
...........................
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
|
|
|
using ':PHDR'. *Note PHDRS::. If a section is assigned to one or more
|
|
|
segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be assigned to
|
|
|
those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly ':PHDR' modifier.
|
|
|
You can use ':NONE' to tell the linker to not put the section in any
|
|
|
segment at all.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here is a simple example:
|
|
|
PHDRS { text PT_LOAD ; }
|
|
|
SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } :text }
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Output Section Fill, Prev: Output Section Phdr, Up: Output Section Attributes
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.6.8.8 Output Section Fill
|
|
|
...........................
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using '=FILLEXP'.
|
|
|
FILLEXP is an expression (*note Expressions::). Any otherwise
|
|
|
unspecified regions of memory within the output section (for example,
|
|
|
gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) will be
|
|
|
filled with the value, repeated as necessary. If the fill expression is
|
|
|
a simple hex number, ie. a string of hex digit starting with '0x' and
|
|
|
without a trailing 'k' or 'M', then an arbitrarily long sequence of hex
|
|
|
digits can be used to specify the fill pattern; Leading zeros become
|
|
|
part of the pattern too. For all other cases, including extra
|
|
|
parentheses or a unary '+', the fill pattern is the four least
|
|
|
significant bytes of the value of the expression. In all cases, the
|
|
|
number is big-endian.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can also change the fill value with a 'FILL' command in the
|
|
|
output section commands; (*note Output Section Data::).
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here is a simple example:
|
|
|
SECTIONS { .text : { *(.text) } =0x90909090 }
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Overlay Description, Prev: Output Section Attributes, Up: SECTIONS
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.6.9 Overlay Description
|
|
|
-------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
|
|
|
are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
|
|
|
the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
|
|
|
copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
|
|
|
required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
|
|
|
can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
|
|
|
than another.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Overlays are described using the 'OVERLAY' command. The 'OVERLAY'
|
|
|
command is used within a 'SECTIONS' command, like an output section
|
|
|
description. The full syntax of the 'OVERLAY' command is as follows:
|
|
|
OVERLAY [START] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( LDADDR )]
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
SECNAME1
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
|
|
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
} [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
|
|
|
SECNAME2
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
|
|
OUTPUT-SECTION-COMMAND
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
} [:PHDR...] [=FILL]
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
} [>REGION] [:PHDR...] [=FILL] [,]
|
|
|
|
|
|
Everything is optional except 'OVERLAY' (a keyword), and each section
|
|
|
must have a name (SECNAME1 and SECNAME2 above). The section definitions
|
|
|
within the 'OVERLAY' construct are identical to those within the general
|
|
|
'SECTIONS' construct (*note SECTIONS::), except that no addresses and no
|
|
|
memory regions may be defined for sections within an 'OVERLAY'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The comma at the end may be required if a FILL is used and the next
|
|
|
SECTIONS-COMMAND looks like a continuation of the expression.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The
|
|
|
load addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are
|
|
|
consecutive in memory starting at the load address used for the
|
|
|
'OVERLAY' as a whole (as with normal section definitions, the load
|
|
|
address is optional, and defaults to the start address; the start
|
|
|
address is also optional, and defaults to the current value of the
|
|
|
location counter).
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the 'NOCROSSREFS' keyword is used, and there are any references
|
|
|
among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
|
|
|
all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
|
|
|
section to refer directly to another. *Note NOCROSSREFS: Miscellaneous
|
|
|
Commands.
|
|
|
|
|
|
For each section within the 'OVERLAY', the linker automatically
|
|
|
provides two symbols. The symbol '__load_start_SECNAME' is defined as
|
|
|
the starting load address of the section. The symbol
|
|
|
'__load_stop_SECNAME' is defined as the final load address of the
|
|
|
section. Any characters within SECNAME which are not legal within C
|
|
|
identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these symbols to
|
|
|
move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
|
|
|
|
|
|
At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set
|
|
|
to the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest
|
|
|
section.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
|
|
|
'SECTIONS' construct.
|
|
|
OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
.text0 { o1/*.o(.text) }
|
|
|
.text1 { o2/*.o(.text) }
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
This will define both '.text0' and '.text1' to start at address 0x1000.
|
|
|
'.text0' will be loaded at address 0x4000, and '.text1' will be loaded
|
|
|
immediately after '.text0'. The following symbols will be defined if
|
|
|
referenced: '__load_start_text0', '__load_stop_text0',
|
|
|
'__load_start_text1', '__load_stop_text1'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
C code to copy overlay '.text1' into the overlay area might look like
|
|
|
the following.
|
|
|
|
|
|
extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
|
|
|
memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
|
|
|
&__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that the 'OVERLAY' command is just syntactic sugar, since
|
|
|
everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
|
|
|
example could have been written identically as follows.
|
|
|
|
|
|
.text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) { o1/*.o(.text) }
|
|
|
PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
|
|
|
PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
|
|
|
.text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) { o2/*.o(.text) }
|
|
|
PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
|
|
|
PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
|
|
|
. = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: MEMORY, Next: PHDRS, Prev: SECTIONS, Up: Scripts
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.7 MEMORY Command
|
|
|
==================
|
|
|
|
|
|
The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
|
|
|
memory. You can override this by using the 'MEMORY' command.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The 'MEMORY' command describes the location and size of blocks of
|
|
|
memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
|
|
|
may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
|
|
|
can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
|
|
|
set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
|
|
|
regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
|
|
|
around to fit into the available regions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A linker script may contain many uses of the 'MEMORY' command,
|
|
|
however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were specified
|
|
|
inside a single 'MEMORY' command. The syntax for 'MEMORY' is:
|
|
|
MEMORY
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
NAME [(ATTR)] : ORIGIN = ORIGIN, LENGTH = LEN
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
The NAME is a name used in the linker script to refer to the region.
|
|
|
The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script. Region
|
|
|
names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
|
|
|
symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region must
|
|
|
have a distinct name within the 'MEMORY' command. However you can add
|
|
|
later alias names to existing memory regions with the *note
|
|
|
REGION_ALIAS:: command.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The ATTR string is an optional list of attributes that specify
|
|
|
whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
|
|
|
not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in *note
|
|
|
SECTIONS::, if you do not specify an output section for some input
|
|
|
section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
|
|
|
the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
|
|
|
them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The ATTR string must consist only of the following characters:
|
|
|
'R'
|
|
|
Read-only section
|
|
|
'W'
|
|
|
Read/write section
|
|
|
'X'
|
|
|
Executable section
|
|
|
'A'
|
|
|
Allocatable section
|
|
|
'I'
|
|
|
Initialized section
|
|
|
'L'
|
|
|
Same as 'I'
|
|
|
'!'
|
|
|
Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
|
|
|
|
|
|
If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other
|
|
|
than '!', it will be placed in the memory region. The '!' attribute
|
|
|
reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an unmapped
|
|
|
section will be placed in the memory region only if it does not match
|
|
|
any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute string of
|
|
|
'RW!X' will match any unmapped section that has either or both of the
|
|
|
'R' and 'W' attributes, but only as long as the section does not also
|
|
|
have the 'X' attribute.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The ORIGIN is an numerical expression for the start address of the
|
|
|
memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it cannot
|
|
|
involve any symbols. The keyword 'ORIGIN' may be abbreviated to 'org'
|
|
|
or 'o' (but not, for example, 'ORG').
|
|
|
|
|
|
The LEN is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory region.
|
|
|
As with the ORIGIN expression, the expression must be numerical only and
|
|
|
must evaluate to a constant. The keyword 'LENGTH' may be abbreviated to
|
|
|
'len' or 'l'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In the following example, we specify that there are two memory
|
|
|
regions available for allocation: one starting at '0' for 256 kilobytes,
|
|
|
and the other starting at '0x40000000' for four megabytes. The linker
|
|
|
will place into the 'rom' memory region every section which is not
|
|
|
explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only or
|
|
|
executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
|
|
|
explicitly mapped into a memory region into the 'ram' memory region.
|
|
|
|
|
|
MEMORY
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
|
|
|
ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
|
|
|
specific output sections into that memory region by using the '>REGION'
|
|
|
output section attribute. For example, if you have a memory region
|
|
|
named 'mem', you would use '>mem' in the output section definition.
|
|
|
*Note Output Section Region::. If no address was specified for the
|
|
|
output section, the linker will set the address to the next available
|
|
|
address within the memory region. If the combined output sections
|
|
|
directed to a memory region are too large for the region, the linker
|
|
|
will issue an error message.
|
|
|
|
|
|
It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
|
|
|
expression via the 'ORIGIN(MEMORY)' and 'LENGTH(MEMORY)' functions:
|
|
|
|
|
|
_fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: PHDRS, Next: VERSION, Prev: MEMORY, Up: Scripts
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.8 PHDRS Command
|
|
|
=================
|
|
|
|
|
|
The ELF object file format uses "program headers", also knows as
|
|
|
"segments". The program headers describe how the program should be
|
|
|
loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the 'objdump'
|
|
|
program with the '-p' option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
|
|
|
reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
|
|
|
program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
|
|
|
This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
|
|
|
interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The linker will create reasonable program headers by default.
|
|
|
However, in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
|
|
|
precisely. You may use the 'PHDRS' command for this purpose. When the
|
|
|
linker sees the 'PHDRS' command in the linker script, it will not create
|
|
|
any program headers other than the ones specified.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The linker only pays attention to the 'PHDRS' command when generating
|
|
|
an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply ignore
|
|
|
'PHDRS'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This is the syntax of the 'PHDRS' command. The words 'PHDRS',
|
|
|
'FILEHDR', 'AT', and 'FLAGS' are keywords.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PHDRS
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
NAME TYPE [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( ADDRESS ) ]
|
|
|
[ FLAGS ( FLAGS ) ] ;
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
The NAME is used only for reference in the 'SECTIONS' command of the
|
|
|
linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program header
|
|
|
names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict with
|
|
|
symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header must
|
|
|
have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it is
|
|
|
usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
|
|
|
system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
|
|
|
specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
|
|
|
sections in the segments. You use the ':PHDR' output section attribute
|
|
|
to place a section in a particular segment. *Note Output Section
|
|
|
Phdr::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
|
|
|
merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
|
|
|
repeat ':PHDR', using it once for each segment which should contain the
|
|
|
section.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you place a section in one or more segments using ':PHDR', then
|
|
|
the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do not
|
|
|
specify ':PHDR' in the same segments. This is for convenience, since
|
|
|
generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be placed in a single
|
|
|
segment. You can use ':NONE' to override the default segment and tell
|
|
|
the linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may use the 'FILEHDR' and 'PHDRS' keywords after the program
|
|
|
header type to further describe the contents of the segment. The
|
|
|
'FILEHDR' keyword means that the segment should include the ELF file
|
|
|
header. The 'PHDRS' keyword means that the segment should include the
|
|
|
ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable segment
|
|
|
('PT_LOAD'), all prior loadable segments must have one of these
|
|
|
keywords.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The TYPE may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the value
|
|
|
of the keyword.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'PT_NULL' (0)
|
|
|
Indicates an unused program header.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'PT_LOAD' (1)
|
|
|
Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded
|
|
|
from the file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'PT_DYNAMIC' (2)
|
|
|
Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'PT_INTERP' (3)
|
|
|
Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may
|
|
|
be found.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'PT_NOTE' (4)
|
|
|
Indicates a segment holding note information.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'PT_SHLIB' (5)
|
|
|
A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the
|
|
|
ELF ABI.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'PT_PHDR' (6)
|
|
|
Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'PT_TLS' (7)
|
|
|
Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
|
|
|
|
|
|
EXPRESSION
|
|
|
An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This
|
|
|
may be used for types not defined above.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular
|
|
|
address in memory by using an 'AT' expression. This is identical to the
|
|
|
'AT' command used as an output section attribute (*note Output Section
|
|
|
LMA::). The 'AT' command for a program header overrides the output
|
|
|
section attribute.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
|
|
|
which comprise the segment. You may use the 'FLAGS' keyword to
|
|
|
explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of FLAGS must be an
|
|
|
integer. It is used to set the 'p_flags' field of the program header.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here is an example of 'PHDRS'. This shows a typical set of program
|
|
|
headers used on a native ELF system.
|
|
|
|
|
|
PHDRS
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
|
|
|
interp PT_INTERP ;
|
|
|
text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
|
|
|
data PT_LOAD ;
|
|
|
dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
SECTIONS
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
. = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
|
|
|
.interp : { *(.interp) } :text :interp
|
|
|
.text : { *(.text) } :text
|
|
|
.rodata : { *(.rodata) } /* defaults to :text */
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
. = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
|
|
|
.data : { *(.data) } :data
|
|
|
.dynamic : { *(.dynamic) } :data :dynamic
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: VERSION, Next: Expressions, Prev: PHDRS, Up: Scripts
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.9 VERSION Command
|
|
|
===================
|
|
|
|
|
|
The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
|
|
|
only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
|
|
|
symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
|
|
|
a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
|
|
|
shared library.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can include a version script directly in the main linker script,
|
|
|
or you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You
|
|
|
can also use the '--version-script' linker option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The syntax of the 'VERSION' command is simply
|
|
|
VERSION { version-script-commands }
|
|
|
|
|
|
The format of the version script commands is identical to that used
|
|
|
by Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
|
|
|
version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
|
|
|
version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
|
|
|
version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
|
|
|
scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
|
|
|
library.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a
|
|
|
few examples.
|
|
|
|
|
|
VERS_1.1 {
|
|
|
global:
|
|
|
foo1;
|
|
|
local:
|
|
|
old*;
|
|
|
original*;
|
|
|
new*;
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
|
|
|
VERS_1.2 {
|
|
|
foo2;
|
|
|
} VERS_1.1;
|
|
|
|
|
|
VERS_2.0 {
|
|
|
bar1; bar2;
|
|
|
extern "C++" {
|
|
|
ns::*;
|
|
|
"f(int, double)";
|
|
|
};
|
|
|
} VERS_1.2;
|
|
|
|
|
|
This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
|
|
|
version node defined is 'VERS_1.1'; it has no other dependencies. The
|
|
|
script binds the symbol 'foo1' to 'VERS_1.1'. It reduces a number of
|
|
|
symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside of the
|
|
|
shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any symbol
|
|
|
whose name begins with 'old', 'original', or 'new' is matched. The
|
|
|
wildcard patterns available are the same as those used in the shell when
|
|
|
matching filenames (also known as "globbing"). However, if you specify
|
|
|
the symbol name inside double quotes, then the name is treated as
|
|
|
literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Next, the version script defines node 'VERS_1.2'. This node depends
|
|
|
upon 'VERS_1.1'. The script binds the symbol 'foo2' to the version node
|
|
|
'VERS_1.2'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Finally, the version script defines node 'VERS_2.0'. This node
|
|
|
depends upon 'VERS_1.2'. The scripts binds the symbols 'bar1' and
|
|
|
'bar2' are bound to the version node 'VERS_2.0'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
|
|
|
specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
|
|
|
unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
|
|
|
unspecified symbols to a given version node by using 'global: *;'
|
|
|
somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
|
|
|
wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
|
|
|
wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
|
|
|
set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
|
|
|
ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than
|
|
|
what they might suggest to the person reading them. The '2.0' version
|
|
|
could just as well have appeared in between '1.1' and '1.2'. However,
|
|
|
this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node in the
|
|
|
version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
|
|
|
symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and
|
|
|
which won't.
|
|
|
|
|
|
{ global: foo; bar; local: *; };
|
|
|
|
|
|
When you link an application against a shared library that has
|
|
|
versioned symbols, the application itself knows which version of each
|
|
|
symbol it requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from
|
|
|
each shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
|
|
|
loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
|
|
|
linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
|
|
|
application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
|
|
|
way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
|
|
|
all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
|
|
|
search for each symbol reference.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
|
|
|
doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
|
|
|
that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
|
|
|
functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
|
|
|
the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
|
|
|
required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
|
|
|
that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
|
|
|
versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
|
|
|
the libraries being used with the application are too old.
|
|
|
|
|
|
There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
|
|
|
first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
|
|
|
source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
|
|
|
script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
|
|
|
maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
|
|
|
__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@VERS_1.1");
|
|
|
in the C source file. This renames the function 'original_foo' to be an
|
|
|
alias for 'foo' bound to the version node 'VERS_1.1'. The 'local:'
|
|
|
directive can be used to prevent the symbol 'original_foo' from being
|
|
|
exported. A '.symver' directive takes precedence over a version script.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
|
|
|
function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
|
|
|
an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
|
|
|
version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
|
|
|
linked against the old interface to continue to function.
|
|
|
|
|
|
To do this, you must use multiple '.symver' directives in the source
|
|
|
file. Here is an example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@");
|
|
|
__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@VERS_1.1");
|
|
|
__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@VERS_1.2");
|
|
|
__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@VERS_2.0");
|
|
|
|
|
|
In this example, 'foo@' represents the symbol 'foo' bound to the
|
|
|
unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains
|
|
|
this example would define 4 C functions: 'original_foo', 'old_foo',
|
|
|
'old_foo1', and 'new_foo'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to
|
|
|
be some way to specify a default version to which external references to
|
|
|
this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the 'foo@@VERS_2.0'
|
|
|
type of '.symver' directive. You can only declare one version of a
|
|
|
symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise you would effectively
|
|
|
have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
|
|
|
within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience (i.e.,
|
|
|
'old_foo'), or you can use the '.symver' directive to specifically bind
|
|
|
to an external version of the function in question.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can also specify the language in the version script:
|
|
|
|
|
|
VERSION extern "lang" { version-script-commands }
|
|
|
|
|
|
The supported 'lang's are 'C', 'C++', and 'Java'. The linker will
|
|
|
iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and demangle them
|
|
|
according to 'lang' before matching them to the patterns specified in
|
|
|
'version-script-commands'. The default 'lang' is 'C'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
|
|
|
described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names, or
|
|
|
you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In the
|
|
|
latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
|
|
|
whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
|
|
|
cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler might
|
|
|
change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you should
|
|
|
check that all of your version directives are behaving as you expect
|
|
|
when you upgrade.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Expressions, Next: Implicit Linker Scripts, Prev: VERSION, Up: Scripts
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.10 Expressions in Linker Scripts
|
|
|
==================================
|
|
|
|
|
|
The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
|
|
|
that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
|
|
|
expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
|
|
|
host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use
|
|
|
in expressions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Menu:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Constants:: Constants
|
|
|
* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
|
|
|
* Symbols:: Symbol Names
|
|
|
* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
|
|
|
* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
|
|
|
* Operators:: Operators
|
|
|
* Evaluation:: Evaluation
|
|
|
* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
|
|
|
* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Constants, Next: Symbolic Constants, Up: Expressions
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.10.1 Constants
|
|
|
----------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
All constants are integers.
|
|
|
|
|
|
As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with '0' to be
|
|
|
octal, and an integer beginning with '0x' or '0X' to be hexadecimal.
|
|
|
Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of 'h' or 'H' for hexadecimal,
|
|
|
'o' or 'O' for octal, 'b' or 'B' for binary and 'd' or 'D' for decimal.
|
|
|
Any integer value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be
|
|
|
decimal.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In addition, you can use the suffixes 'K' and 'M' to scale a constant
|
|
|
by '1024' or '1024*1024' respectively. For example, the following all
|
|
|
refer to the same quantity:
|
|
|
|
|
|
_fourk_1 = 4K;
|
|
|
_fourk_2 = 4096;
|
|
|
_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
|
|
|
_fourk_4 = 10000o;
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note - the 'K' and 'M' suffixes cannot be used in conjunction with
|
|
|
the base suffixes mentioned above.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Symbolic Constants, Next: Symbols, Prev: Constants, Up: Expressions
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.10.2 Symbolic Constants
|
|
|
-------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of the
|
|
|
'CONSTANT(NAME)' operator, where NAME is one of:
|
|
|
|
|
|
'MAXPAGESIZE'
|
|
|
The target's maximum page size.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'COMMONPAGESIZE'
|
|
|
The target's default page size.
|
|
|
|
|
|
So for example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
.text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : { *(.text) }
|
|
|
|
|
|
will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
|
|
|
supported by the target.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Symbols, Next: Orphan Sections, Prev: Symbolic Constants, Up: Expressions
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.10.3 Symbol Names
|
|
|
-------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
|
|
|
and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
|
|
|
Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
|
|
|
specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
|
|
|
keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
|
|
|
"SECTION" = 9;
|
|
|
"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
|
|
|
|
|
|
Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is
|
|
|
safest to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, 'A-B' is one
|
|
|
symbol, whereas 'A - B' is an expression involving subtraction.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Orphan Sections, Next: Location Counter, Prev: Symbols, Up: Expressions
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.10.4 Orphan Sections
|
|
|
----------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which are not
|
|
|
explicitly placed into the output file by the linker script. The linker
|
|
|
will still copy these sections into the output file by either finding,
|
|
|
or creating a suitable output section in which to place the orphaned
|
|
|
input section.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
|
|
|
an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
|
|
|
placed at the end of that output section.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
|
|
|
sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
|
|
|
name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
|
|
|
orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into one
|
|
|
new output section.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
|
|
|
then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections in
|
|
|
relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
|
|
|
linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
|
|
|
attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
|
|
|
sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
|
|
|
support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The command-line options '--orphan-handling' and '--unique' (*note
|
|
|
Command-line Options: Options.) can be used to control which output
|
|
|
sections an orphan is placed in.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Location Counter, Next: Operators, Prev: Orphan Sections, Up: Expressions
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.10.5 The Location Counter
|
|
|
---------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
The special linker variable "dot" '.' always contains the current output
|
|
|
location counter. Since the '.' always refers to a location in an
|
|
|
output section, it may only appear in an expression within a 'SECTIONS'
|
|
|
command. The '.' symbol may appear anywhere that an ordinary symbol is
|
|
|
allowed in an expression.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Assigning a value to '.' will cause the location counter to be moved.
|
|
|
This may be used to create holes in the output section. The location
|
|
|
counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section, and may not
|
|
|
be moved backwards outside of an output section if so doing creates
|
|
|
areas with overlapping LMAs.
|
|
|
|
|
|
SECTIONS
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
output :
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
file1(.text)
|
|
|
. = . + 1000;
|
|
|
file2(.text)
|
|
|
. += 1000;
|
|
|
file3(.text)
|
|
|
} = 0x12345678;
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
In the previous example, the '.text' section from 'file1' is located at
|
|
|
the beginning of the output section 'output'. It is followed by a 1000
|
|
|
byte gap. Then the '.text' section from 'file2' appears, also with a
|
|
|
1000 byte gap following before the '.text' section from 'file3'. The
|
|
|
notation '= 0x12345678' specifies what data to write in the gaps (*note
|
|
|
Output Section Fill::).
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: '.' actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
|
|
|
current containing object. Normally this is the 'SECTIONS' statement,
|
|
|
whose start address is 0, hence '.' can be used as an absolute address.
|
|
|
If '.' is used inside a section description however, it refers to the
|
|
|
byte offset from the start of that section, not an absolute address.
|
|
|
Thus in a script like this:
|
|
|
|
|
|
SECTIONS
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
. = 0x100
|
|
|
.text: {
|
|
|
*(.text)
|
|
|
. = 0x200
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
. = 0x500
|
|
|
.data: {
|
|
|
*(.data)
|
|
|
. += 0x600
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '.text' section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100 and
|
|
|
a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in the
|
|
|
'.text' input sections to fill this area. (If there is too much data,
|
|
|
an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to move '.'
|
|
|
backwards). The '.data' section will start at 0x500 and it will have an
|
|
|
extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of the values from the
|
|
|
'.data' input sections and before the end of the '.data' output section
|
|
|
itself.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
|
|
|
output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
|
|
|
needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
|
|
|
|
|
|
SECTIONS
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
start_of_text = . ;
|
|
|
.text: { *(.text) }
|
|
|
end_of_text = . ;
|
|
|
|
|
|
start_of_data = . ;
|
|
|
.data: { *(.data) }
|
|
|
end_of_data = . ;
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. '.rodata', not
|
|
|
mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section between
|
|
|
'.text' and '.data'. You might think the linker should place '.rodata'
|
|
|
on the blank line in the above script, but blank lines are of no
|
|
|
particular significance to the linker. As well, the linker doesn't
|
|
|
associate the above symbol names with their sections. Instead, it
|
|
|
assumes that all assignments or other statements belong to the previous
|
|
|
output section, except for the special case of an assignment to '.'.
|
|
|
I.e., the linker will place the orphan '.rodata' section as if the
|
|
|
script was written as follows:
|
|
|
|
|
|
SECTIONS
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
start_of_text = . ;
|
|
|
.text: { *(.text) }
|
|
|
end_of_text = . ;
|
|
|
|
|
|
start_of_data = . ;
|
|
|
.rodata: { *(.rodata) }
|
|
|
.data: { *(.data) }
|
|
|
end_of_data = . ;
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
|
|
|
'start_of_data'. One way to influence the orphan section placement is
|
|
|
to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker assumes that an
|
|
|
assignment to '.' is setting the start address of a following output
|
|
|
section and thus should be grouped with that section. So you could
|
|
|
write:
|
|
|
|
|
|
SECTIONS
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
start_of_text = . ;
|
|
|
.text: { *(.text) }
|
|
|
end_of_text = . ;
|
|
|
|
|
|
. = . ;
|
|
|
start_of_data = . ;
|
|
|
.data: { *(.data) }
|
|
|
end_of_data = . ;
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
Now, the orphan '.rodata' section will be placed between
|
|
|
'end_of_text' and 'start_of_data'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Operators, Next: Evaluation, Prev: Location Counter, Up: Expressions
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.10.6 Operators
|
|
|
----------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
|
|
|
the standard bindings and precedence levels:
|
|
|
precedence associativity Operators Notes
|
|
|
(highest)
|
|
|
1 left ! - ~ (1)
|
|
|
2 left * / %
|
|
|
3 left + -
|
|
|
4 left >> <<
|
|
|
5 left == != > < <= >=
|
|
|
6 left &
|
|
|
7 left |
|
|
|
8 left &&
|
|
|
9 left ||
|
|
|
10 right ? :
|
|
|
11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
|
|
|
(lowest)
|
|
|
Notes: (1) Prefix operators (2) *Note Assignments::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Evaluation, Next: Expression Section, Prev: Operators, Up: Expressions
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.10.7 Evaluation
|
|
|
-----------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
|
|
|
an expression when absolutely necessary.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
|
|
|
address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
|
|
|
regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
|
|
|
as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
|
|
|
|
|
|
However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
|
|
|
until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
|
|
|
other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
|
|
|
for use in the symbol assignment expression.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
|
|
|
assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
|
|
|
allocation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
|
|
|
'.', must be evaluated during section allocation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
|
|
|
available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
|
|
|
following
|
|
|
SECTIONS
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
.text 9+this_isnt_constant :
|
|
|
{ *(.text) }
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
will cause the error message 'non constant expression for initial
|
|
|
address'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Expression Section, Next: Builtin Functions, Prev: Evaluation, Up: Expressions
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.10.8 The Section of an Expression
|
|
|
-----------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
|
|
|
relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output using
|
|
|
the '-r' option, a further link operation may change the value of a
|
|
|
section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute symbol will
|
|
|
retain the same value throughout any further link operations.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
|
|
|
section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
|
|
|
address, such as 'ADDR', 'LOADADDR', 'ORIGIN' and 'SEGMENT_START'.
|
|
|
Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin functions that return a
|
|
|
non-address value, such as 'LENGTH'. One complication is that unless
|
|
|
you set 'LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")' (*note Miscellaneous Commands::),
|
|
|
numbers and absolute symbols are treated differently depending on their
|
|
|
location, for compatibility with older versions of 'ld'. Expressions
|
|
|
appearing outside an output section definition treat all numbers as
|
|
|
absolute addresses. Expressions appearing inside an output section
|
|
|
definition treat absolute symbols as numbers. If 'LD_FEATURE
|
|
|
("SANE_EXPR")' is given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply
|
|
|
treated as numbers everywhere.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In the following simple example,
|
|
|
|
|
|
SECTIONS
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
. = 0x100;
|
|
|
__executable_start = 0x100;
|
|
|
.data :
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
. = 0x10;
|
|
|
__data_start = 0x10;
|
|
|
*(.data)
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
both '.' and '__executable_start' are set to the absolute address
|
|
|
0x100 in the first two assignments, then both '.' and '__data_start' are
|
|
|
set to 0x10 relative to the '.data' section in the second two
|
|
|
assignments.
|
|
|
|
|
|
For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
|
|
|
addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
|
|
|
operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
|
|
|
absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
|
|
|
* Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on
|
|
|
two relative addresses in the same section or between one relative
|
|
|
address and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the
|
|
|
address(es).
|
|
|
* Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses
|
|
|
not in the same section, or between a relative address and an
|
|
|
absolute address, first convert any non-absolute term to an
|
|
|
absolute address before applying the operator.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
|
|
|
* The result of comparisons, '&&' and '||' is also a number.
|
|
|
* The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
|
|
|
relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
|
|
|
(after above conversions) is also a number when 'LD_FEATURE
|
|
|
("SANE_EXPR")' or inside an output section definition but an
|
|
|
absolute address otherwise.
|
|
|
* The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
|
|
|
relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
|
|
|
section as the relative operand(s).
|
|
|
* The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
|
|
|
conversions) is an absolute address.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can use the builtin function 'ABSOLUTE' to force an expression to
|
|
|
be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to create
|
|
|
an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output section
|
|
|
'.data':
|
|
|
SECTIONS
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
.data : { *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); }
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
If 'ABSOLUTE' were not used, '_edata' would be relative to the '.data'
|
|
|
section.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Using 'LOADADDR' also forces an expression absolute, since this
|
|
|
particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Builtin Functions, Prev: Expression Section, Up: Expressions
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.10.9 Builtin Functions
|
|
|
------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
|
|
|
use in linker script expressions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'ABSOLUTE(EXP)'
|
|
|
Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative)
|
|
|
value of the expression EXP. Primarily useful to assign an
|
|
|
absolute value to a symbol within a section definition, where
|
|
|
symbol values are normally section relative. *Note Expression
|
|
|
Section::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'ADDR(SECTION)'
|
|
|
Return the address (VMA) of the named SECTION. Your script must
|
|
|
previously have defined the location of that section. In the
|
|
|
following example, 'start_of_output_1', 'symbol_1' and 'symbol_2'
|
|
|
are assigned equivalent values, except that 'symbol_1' will be
|
|
|
relative to the '.output1' section while the other two will be
|
|
|
absolute:
|
|
|
SECTIONS { ...
|
|
|
.output1 :
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
.output :
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
|
|
|
symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
... }
|
|
|
|
|
|
'ALIGN(ALIGN)'
|
|
|
'ALIGN(EXP,ALIGN)'
|
|
|
Return the location counter ('.') or arbitrary expression aligned
|
|
|
to the next ALIGN boundary. The single operand 'ALIGN' doesn't
|
|
|
change the value of the location counter--it just does arithmetic
|
|
|
on it. The two operand 'ALIGN' allows an arbitrary expression to
|
|
|
be aligned upwards ('ALIGN(ALIGN)' is equivalent to
|
|
|
'ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), ALIGN)').
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here is an example which aligns the output '.data' section to the
|
|
|
next '0x2000' byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
|
|
|
variable within the section to the next '0x8000' boundary after the
|
|
|
input sections:
|
|
|
SECTIONS { ...
|
|
|
.data ALIGN(0x2000): {
|
|
|
*(.data)
|
|
|
variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
... }
|
|
|
The first use of 'ALIGN' in this example specifies the location of
|
|
|
a section because it is used as the optional ADDRESS attribute of a
|
|
|
section definition (*note Output Section Address::). The second
|
|
|
use of 'ALIGN' is used to defines the value of a symbol.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The builtin function 'NEXT' is closely related to 'ALIGN'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'ALIGNOF(SECTION)'
|
|
|
Return the alignment in bytes of the named SECTION, if that section
|
|
|
has been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when
|
|
|
this is evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the
|
|
|
following example, the alignment of the '.output' section is stored
|
|
|
as the first value in that section.
|
|
|
SECTIONS{ ...
|
|
|
.output {
|
|
|
LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
... }
|
|
|
|
|
|
'BLOCK(EXP)'
|
|
|
This is a synonym for 'ALIGN', for compatibility with older linker
|
|
|
scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an
|
|
|
output section.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE, COMMONPAGESIZE)'
|
|
|
This is equivalent to either
|
|
|
(ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE) + (. & (MAXPAGESIZE - 1)))
|
|
|
or
|
|
|
(ALIGN(MAXPAGESIZE)
|
|
|
+ ((. + COMMONPAGESIZE - 1) & (MAXPAGESIZE - COMMONPAGESIZE)))
|
|
|
depending on whether the latter uses fewer COMMONPAGESIZE sized
|
|
|
pages for the data segment (area between the result of this
|
|
|
expression and 'DATA_SEGMENT_END') than the former or not. If the
|
|
|
latter form is used, it means COMMONPAGESIZE bytes of runtime
|
|
|
memory will be saved at the expense of up to COMMONPAGESIZE wasted
|
|
|
bytes in the on-disk file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This expression can only be used directly in 'SECTIONS' commands,
|
|
|
not in any output section descriptions and only once in the linker
|
|
|
script. COMMONPAGESIZE should be less or equal to MAXPAGESIZE and
|
|
|
should be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for
|
|
|
while still running on system page sizes up to MAXPAGESIZE. Note
|
|
|
however that '-z relro' protection will not be effective if the
|
|
|
system page size is larger than COMMONPAGESIZE.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Example:
|
|
|
. = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
|
|
|
|
|
|
'DATA_SEGMENT_END(EXP)'
|
|
|
This defines the end of data segment for 'DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN'
|
|
|
evaluation purposes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
. = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
|
|
|
|
|
|
'DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(OFFSET, EXP)'
|
|
|
This defines the end of the 'PT_GNU_RELRO' segment when '-z relro'
|
|
|
option is used. When '-z relro' option is not present,
|
|
|
'DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END' does nothing, otherwise
|
|
|
'DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' is padded so that EXP + OFFSET is aligned to
|
|
|
the COMMONPAGESIZE argument given to 'DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN'. If
|
|
|
present in the linker script, it must be placed between
|
|
|
'DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN' and 'DATA_SEGMENT_END'. Evaluates to the
|
|
|
second argument plus any padding needed at the end of the
|
|
|
'PT_GNU_RELRO' segment due to section alignment.
|
|
|
|
|
|
. = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
|
|
|
|
|
|
'DEFINED(SYMBOL)'
|
|
|
Return 1 if SYMBOL is in the linker global symbol table and is
|
|
|
defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
|
|
|
return 0. You can use this function to provide default values for
|
|
|
symbols. For example, the following script fragment shows how to
|
|
|
set a global symbol 'begin' to the first location in the '.text'
|
|
|
section--but if a symbol called 'begin' already existed, its value
|
|
|
is preserved:
|
|
|
|
|
|
SECTIONS { ...
|
|
|
.text : {
|
|
|
begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
'LENGTH(MEMORY)'
|
|
|
Return the length of the memory region named MEMORY.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'LOADADDR(SECTION)'
|
|
|
Return the absolute LMA of the named SECTION. (*note Output
|
|
|
Section LMA::).
|
|
|
|
|
|
'LOG2CEIL(EXP)'
|
|
|
Return the binary logarithm of EXP rounded towards infinity.
|
|
|
'LOG2CEIL(0)' returns 0.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'MAX(EXP1, EXP2)'
|
|
|
Returns the maximum of EXP1 and EXP2.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'MIN(EXP1, EXP2)'
|
|
|
Returns the minimum of EXP1 and EXP2.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'NEXT(EXP)'
|
|
|
Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of EXP.
|
|
|
This function is closely related to 'ALIGN(EXP)'; unless you use
|
|
|
the 'MEMORY' command to define discontinuous memory for the output
|
|
|
file, the two functions are equivalent.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'ORIGIN(MEMORY)'
|
|
|
Return the origin of the memory region named MEMORY.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'SEGMENT_START(SEGMENT, DEFAULT)'
|
|
|
Return the base address of the named SEGMENT. If an explicit value
|
|
|
has already been given for this segment (with a command-line '-T'
|
|
|
option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value will
|
|
|
be DEFAULT. At present, the '-T' command-line option can only be
|
|
|
used to set the base address for the "text", "data", and "bss"
|
|
|
sections, but you can use 'SEGMENT_START' with any segment name.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'SIZEOF(SECTION)'
|
|
|
Return the size in bytes of the named SECTION, if that section has
|
|
|
been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
|
|
|
evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following
|
|
|
example, 'symbol_1' and 'symbol_2' are assigned identical values:
|
|
|
SECTIONS{ ...
|
|
|
.output {
|
|
|
.start = . ;
|
|
|
...
|
|
|
.end = . ;
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
|
|
|
symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
|
|
|
... }
|
|
|
|
|
|
'SIZEOF_HEADERS'
|
|
|
'sizeof_headers'
|
|
|
Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
|
|
|
information which appears at the start of the output file. You can
|
|
|
use this number when setting the start address of the first
|
|
|
section, if you choose, to facilitate paging.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
|
|
|
'SIZEOF_HEADERS' builtin function, the linker must compute the
|
|
|
number of program headers before it has determined all the section
|
|
|
addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
|
|
|
additional program headers, it will report an error 'not enough
|
|
|
room for program headers'. To avoid this error, you must avoid
|
|
|
using the 'SIZEOF_HEADERS' function, or you must rework your linker
|
|
|
script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program
|
|
|
headers, or you must define the program headers yourself using the
|
|
|
'PHDRS' command (*note PHDRS::).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Implicit Linker Scripts, Prev: Expressions, Up: Scripts
|
|
|
|
|
|
3.11 Implicit Linker Scripts
|
|
|
============================
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
|
|
|
an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
|
|
|
linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
|
|
|
linker will report an error.
|
|
|
|
|
|
An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
|
|
|
assignments, or the 'INPUT', 'GROUP', or 'VERSION' commands.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be
|
|
|
read at the position in the command line where the implicit linker
|
|
|
script was read. This can affect archive searching.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Machine Dependent, Next: BFD, Prev: Scripts, Up: Top
|
|
|
|
|
|
4 Machine Dependent Features
|
|
|
****************************
|
|
|
|
|
|
'ld' has additional features on some platforms; the following sections
|
|
|
describe them. Machines where 'ld' has no additional functionality are
|
|
|
not listed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Menu:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* H8/300:: 'ld' and the H8/300
|
|
|
* M68HC11/68HC12:: 'ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
|
|
|
* ARM:: 'ld' and the ARM family
|
|
|
* HPPA ELF32:: 'ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF
|
|
|
* M68K:: 'ld' and the Motorola 68K family
|
|
|
* MIPS:: 'ld' and the MIPS family
|
|
|
* MMIX:: 'ld' and MMIX
|
|
|
* MSP430:: 'ld' and MSP430
|
|
|
* NDS32:: 'ld' and NDS32
|
|
|
* Nios II:: 'ld' and the Altera Nios II
|
|
|
* PowerPC ELF32:: 'ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
|
|
|
* PowerPC64 ELF64:: 'ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
|
|
|
* S/390 ELF:: 'ld' and S/390 ELF Support
|
|
|
* SPU ELF:: 'ld' and SPU ELF Support
|
|
|
* TI COFF:: 'ld' and TI COFF
|
|
|
* WIN32:: 'ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
|
|
|
* Xtensa:: 'ld' and Xtensa Processors
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: H8/300, Next: M68HC11/68HC12, Up: Machine Dependent
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.1 'ld' and the H8/300
|
|
|
=======================
|
|
|
|
|
|
For the H8/300, 'ld' can perform these global optimizations when you
|
|
|
specify the '--relax' command-line option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_relaxing address modes_
|
|
|
'ld' finds all 'jsr' and 'jmp' instructions whose targets are
|
|
|
within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
|
|
|
relative 'bsr' and 'bra' instructions, respectively.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_synthesizing instructions_
|
|
|
'ld' finds all 'mov.b' instructions which use the sixteen-bit
|
|
|
absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
|
|
|
changes them to use the eight-bit address form. (That is: the
|
|
|
linker turns 'mov.b '@'AA:16' into 'mov.b '@'AA:8' whenever the
|
|
|
address AA is in the top page of memory).
|
|
|
|
|
|
'ld' finds all 'mov' instructions which use the register indirect
|
|
|
with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
|
|
|
displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to
|
|
|
use the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns
|
|
|
'mov.b '@'D:32,ERx' into 'mov.b '@'D:16,ERx' whenever the
|
|
|
displacement D is in the 16 bit signed integer range. Only
|
|
|
implemented in ELF-format ld).
|
|
|
|
|
|
_bit manipulation instructions_
|
|
|
'ld' finds all bit manipulation instructions like 'band, bclr,
|
|
|
biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst,
|
|
|
bxor' which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer
|
|
|
to the top page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit
|
|
|
address form. (That is: the linker turns 'bset #xx:3,'@'AA:32'
|
|
|
into 'bset #xx:3,'@'AA:8' whenever the address AA is in the top
|
|
|
page of memory).
|
|
|
|
|
|
_system control instructions_
|
|
|
'ld' finds all 'ldc.w, stc.w' instructions which use the 32 bit
|
|
|
absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
|
|
|
changes them to use 16 bit address form. (That is: the linker
|
|
|
turns 'ldc.w '@'AA:32,ccr' into 'ldc.w '@'AA:16,ccr' whenever the
|
|
|
address AA is in the top page of memory).
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: M68HC11/68HC12, Next: ARM, Prev: H8/300, Up: Machine Dependent
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2 'ld' and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
|
|
|
====================================================
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.1 Linker Relaxation
|
|
|
-----------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
For the Motorola 68HC11, 'ld' can perform these global optimizations
|
|
|
when you specify the '--relax' command-line option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_relaxing address modes_
|
|
|
'ld' finds all 'jsr' and 'jmp' instructions whose targets are
|
|
|
within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit program-counter
|
|
|
relative 'bsr' and 'bra' instructions, respectively.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'ld' also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
|
|
|
transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
|
|
|
page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
|
|
|
|
|
|
_relaxing gcc instruction group_
|
|
|
When 'gcc' is called with '-mrelax', it can emit group of
|
|
|
instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
|
|
|
addressing mode. These instructions consists of 'bclr' or 'bset'
|
|
|
instructions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.2.2 Trampoline Generation
|
|
|
---------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
For 68HC11 and 68HC12, 'ld' can generate trampoline code to call a far
|
|
|
function using a normal 'jsr' instruction. The linker will also change
|
|
|
the relocation to some far function to use the trampoline address
|
|
|
instead of the function address. This is typically the case when a
|
|
|
pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact point to the
|
|
|
function trampoline.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: ARM, Next: HPPA ELF32, Prev: M68HC11/68HC12, Up: Machine Dependent
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.3 'ld' and the ARM family
|
|
|
===========================
|
|
|
|
|
|
For the ARM, 'ld' will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
|
|
|
between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
|
|
|
been compiled and assembled with the '-mthumb-interwork' command line
|
|
|
option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
|
|
|
libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
|
|
|
option then the '--support-old-code' command-line switch should be given
|
|
|
to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions which
|
|
|
will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however, the
|
|
|
linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
|
|
|
non-interworking aware Thumb code.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--thumb-entry' switch is a duplicate of the generic '--entry'
|
|
|
switch, in that it sets the program's starting address. But it also
|
|
|
sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be branched to using
|
|
|
a BX instruction, and the program will start executing in Thumb mode
|
|
|
straight away.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables' switch is specifying, that the
|
|
|
import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero element
|
|
|
prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate import
|
|
|
tables. By default this option is turned off.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--be8' switch instructs 'ld' to generate BE8 format executables.
|
|
|
This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects - ie ones
|
|
|
which have been assembled with the '-EB' option. The resulting image
|
|
|
will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The 'R_ARM_TARGET1' relocation is typically used for entries in the
|
|
|
'.init_array' section. It is interpreted as either 'R_ARM_REL32' or
|
|
|
'R_ARM_ABS32', depending on the target. The '--target1-rel' and
|
|
|
'--target1-abs' switches override the default.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--target2=type' switch overrides the default definition of the
|
|
|
'R_ARM_TARGET2' relocation. Valid values for 'type', their meanings,
|
|
|
and target defaults are as follows:
|
|
|
'rel'
|
|
|
'R_ARM_REL32' (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
|
|
|
'abs'
|
|
|
'R_ARM_ABS32' (arm*-*-symbianelf)
|
|
|
'got-rel'
|
|
|
'R_ARM_GOT_PREL' (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
|
|
|
|
|
|
The 'R_ARM_V4BX' relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF specification)
|
|
|
enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
|
|
|
interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t,
|
|
|
but also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4
|
|
|
objects.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In the latter case, the switch '--fix-v4bx' must be passed to the
|
|
|
linker, which causes v4t 'BX rM' instructions to be rewritten as 'MOV
|
|
|
PC,rM', since v4 processors do not have a 'BX' instruction.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In the former case, the switch should not be used, and 'R_ARM_V4BX'
|
|
|
relocations are ignored.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Replace 'BX rM' instructions identified by 'R_ARM_V4BX' relocations
|
|
|
with a branch to the following veneer:
|
|
|
|
|
|
TST rM, #1
|
|
|
MOVEQ PC, rM
|
|
|
BX Rn
|
|
|
|
|
|
This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4
|
|
|
cores and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer
|
|
|
clobbers the condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in
|
|
|
rare cases.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--use-blx' switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb BLX
|
|
|
instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various situations.
|
|
|
Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb code using
|
|
|
BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before each PLT
|
|
|
entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need
|
|
|
to specify it if you are using that target.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--vfp11-denorm-fix' switch enables a link-time workaround for a
|
|
|
bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
|
|
|
instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support
|
|
|
code) to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions
|
|
|
before the support code can read the intended values.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
|
|
|
intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a
|
|
|
register and another instruction which writes to the same register, or
|
|
|
at least two intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug
|
|
|
only affects full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this
|
|
|
workaround if you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for
|
|
|
further details.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can enable this
|
|
|
workaround by specifying the linker option '--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar' if
|
|
|
you are using the VFP11 scalar mode only, or '--vfp-denorm-fix=vector'
|
|
|
if you are using vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code).
|
|
|
The default is '--vfp-denorm-fix=none'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
|
|
|
potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each such
|
|
|
sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
|
|
|
first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
|
|
|
instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
|
|
|
the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the
|
|
|
veneer are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector
|
|
|
cases.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--fix-arm1176' switch enables a link-time workaround for an
|
|
|
erratum in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by
|
|
|
default if you are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It
|
|
|
can be disabled unconditionally by specifying '--no-fix-arm1176'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Further information is available in the "ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
|
|
|
Programmer Advice Notice" available on the ARM documentation website at:
|
|
|
http://infocenter.arm.com/.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--fix-stm32l4xx-629360' switch enables a link-time workaround
|
|
|
for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of the STM32
|
|
|
Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing off-chip memory
|
|
|
via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more, the bus can
|
|
|
generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only core-initiated
|
|
|
accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access: integer loads such as
|
|
|
LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM, VPOP. Stores are not
|
|
|
affected.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
|
|
|
necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
|
|
|
'--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none'. If you know you are using buggy
|
|
|
STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
|
|
|
linker option '--fix-stm32l4xx-629360', or the equivalent
|
|
|
'--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
|
|
|
potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each such
|
|
|
sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
|
|
|
replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
|
|
|
branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
|
|
|
then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
|
|
|
the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
|
|
|
they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
|
|
|
there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
|
|
|
occurs.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
|
|
|
PC-relative branch instruction if the '.text' section is too large. In
|
|
|
that case, when the branch that replaces the original code cannot be
|
|
|
encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement occurs.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--no-enum-size-warning' switch prevents the linker from warning
|
|
|
when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI enumeration
|
|
|
size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled, linking of an
|
|
|
object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another using
|
|
|
enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will not be
|
|
|
diagnosed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--no-wchar-size-warning' switch prevents the linker from warning
|
|
|
when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI 'wchar_t' size
|
|
|
attributes. For example, with this switch enabled, linking of an object
|
|
|
file using 32-bit 'wchar_t' values with another using 16-bit 'wchar_t'
|
|
|
values will not be diagnosed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--pic-veneer' switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
|
|
|
ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary is not
|
|
|
PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where '--emit-relocs' is
|
|
|
used to generate relocatable binaries.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
|
|
|
code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
|
|
|
perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The placement
|
|
|
of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is controlled by the
|
|
|
command-line option '--stub-group-size=N'. The placement is important
|
|
|
because a poor choice can create a need for duplicate stubs, increasing
|
|
|
the code size. The linker will try to group stubs together in order to
|
|
|
reduce interruptions to the flow of code, but it needs guidance as to
|
|
|
how big these groups should be and where they should be placed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The value of 'N', the parameter to the '--stub-group-size=' option
|
|
|
controls where the stub groups are placed. If it is negative then all
|
|
|
stubs are placed after the first branch that needs them. If it is
|
|
|
positive then the stubs can be placed either before or after the
|
|
|
branches that need them. If the value of 'N' is 1 (either +1 or -1)
|
|
|
then the linker will choose exactly where to place groups of stubs,
|
|
|
using its built in heuristics. A value of 'N' greater than 1 (or
|
|
|
smaller than -1) tells the linker that a single group of stubs can
|
|
|
service at most 'N' bytes from the input sections.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The default, if '--stub-group-size=' is not specified, is 'N = +1'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
|
|
|
only, because it relies on object files properties not present
|
|
|
otherwise.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--fix-cortex-a8' switch enables a link-time workaround for an
|
|
|
erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by
|
|
|
default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can
|
|
|
be enabled otherwise by specifying '--fix-cortex-a8', or disabled
|
|
|
unconditionally by specifying '--no-fix-cortex-a8'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for
|
|
|
further details.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--fix-cortex-a53-835769' switch enables a link-time workaround
|
|
|
for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53
|
|
|
processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled
|
|
|
by specifying '--fix-cortex-a53-835769', or disabled unconditionally by
|
|
|
specifying '--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Please contact ARM for further details.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--no-merge-exidx-entries' switch disables the merging of
|
|
|
adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--long-plt' option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries which
|
|
|
support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT entries
|
|
|
which only support 512Mb of code.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--no-apply-dynamic-relocs' option makes AArch64 linker do not
|
|
|
apply link-time values for dynamic relocations.
|
|
|
|
|
|
All SG veneers are placed in the special output section
|
|
|
'.gnu.sgstubs'. Its start address must be set, either with the
|
|
|
command-line option '--section-start' or in a linker script, to indicate
|
|
|
where to place these veneers in memory.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--cmse-implib' option requests that the import libraries
|
|
|
specified by the '--out-implib' and '--in-implib' options are secure
|
|
|
gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure executable
|
|
|
against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--in-implib=file' specifies an input import library whose
|
|
|
symbols must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A
|
|
|
warning is given if no '--out-implib' is given but new symbols have been
|
|
|
introduced in the executable that should be listed in its import
|
|
|
library. Otherwise, if '--out-implib' is specified, the symbols are
|
|
|
added to the output import library. A warning is also given if some
|
|
|
symbols present in the input import library have disappeared from the
|
|
|
executable. This option is only effective for Secure Gateway import
|
|
|
libraries, ie. when '--cmse-implib' is specified.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: HPPA ELF32, Next: M68K, Prev: ARM, Up: Machine Dependent
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.4 'ld' and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
|
|
|
====================================
|
|
|
|
|
|
When generating a shared library, 'ld' will by default generate import
|
|
|
stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application. The
|
|
|
'--multi-subspace' switch causes 'ld' to generate export stubs, and
|
|
|
different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with multiple
|
|
|
sub-spaces.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by 'ld' in stub
|
|
|
sections located between groups of input sections. '--stub-group-size'
|
|
|
specifies the maximum size of a group of input sections handled by one
|
|
|
stub section. Since branch offsets are signed, a stub section may serve
|
|
|
two groups of input sections, one group before the stub section, and one
|
|
|
group after it. However, when using conditional branches that require
|
|
|
stubs, it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub sections only
|
|
|
serve one group of input sections. A negative value for 'N' chooses
|
|
|
this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a negative
|
|
|
offset. Two special values of 'N' are recognized, '1' and '-1'. These
|
|
|
both instruct 'ld' to automatically size input section groups for the
|
|
|
branch types detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement
|
|
|
as other positive or negative values of 'N' respectively.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that '--stub-group-size' does not split input sections. A
|
|
|
single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
|
|
|
create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
|
|
|
large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: M68K, Next: MIPS, Prev: HPPA ELF32, Up: Machine Dependent
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.5 'ld' and the Motorola 68K family
|
|
|
====================================
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--got=TYPE' option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme. The
|
|
|
choices are 'single', 'negative', 'multigot' and 'target'. When
|
|
|
'target' is selected the linker chooses the default GOT generation
|
|
|
scheme for the current target. 'single' tells the linker to generate a
|
|
|
single GOT with entries only at non-negative offsets. 'negative'
|
|
|
instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with entries at both
|
|
|
negative and positive offsets. Not all environments support such GOTs.
|
|
|
'multigot' allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the output
|
|
|
file. All GOT references from a single input object file access the
|
|
|
same GOT, but references from different input object files might access
|
|
|
different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: MIPS, Next: MMIX, Prev: M68K, Up: Machine Dependent
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.6 'ld' and the MIPS family
|
|
|
============================
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--insn32' and '--no-insn32' options control the choice of microMIPS
|
|
|
instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that in the
|
|
|
PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If '--insn32' is used,
|
|
|
then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or
|
|
|
if '--no-insn32' is used, all instruction encodings are used, including
|
|
|
16-bit ones where possible.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--ignore-branch-isa' and '--no-ignore-branch-isa' options
|
|
|
control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
|
|
|
'--ignore-branch-isa' is used, then the linker accepts any branch
|
|
|
relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
|
|
|
calculation, except for some cases of 'BAL' instructions which meet
|
|
|
relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent 'JALX'
|
|
|
instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default or
|
|
|
if '--no-ignore-branch-isa' is used a check is made causing the loss of
|
|
|
an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: MMIX, Next: MSP430, Prev: MIPS, Up: Machine Dependent
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.7 'ld' and MMIX
|
|
|
=================
|
|
|
|
|
|
For MMIX, there is a choice of generating 'ELF' object files or 'mmo'
|
|
|
object files when linking. The simulator 'mmix' understands the 'mmo'
|
|
|
format. The binutils 'objcopy' utility can translate between the two
|
|
|
formats.
|
|
|
|
|
|
There is one special section, the '.MMIX.reg_contents' section.
|
|
|
Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
|
|
|
registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special
|
|
|
symbols, equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
|
|
|
'.MMIX.reg_contents' section corresponds to the first allocated global
|
|
|
register multiplied by 8. Register '$255' is not included in this
|
|
|
section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the symbol
|
|
|
'Main' for 'mmo' files.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Global symbols with the prefix '__.MMIX.start.', for example
|
|
|
'__.MMIX.start..text' and '__.MMIX.start..data' are special. The
|
|
|
default linker script uses these to set the default start address of a
|
|
|
section.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a
|
|
|
section, are left out from an mmo file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: MSP430, Next: NDS32, Prev: MMIX, Up: Machine Dependent
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.8 'ld' and MSP430
|
|
|
===================
|
|
|
|
|
|
For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag
|
|
|
'-m [mpu type]' will select an appropriate linker script for selected
|
|
|
MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs just pass '-m help' option to
|
|
|
the linker).
|
|
|
|
|
|
The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430
|
|
|
specific:
|
|
|
|
|
|
''.vectors''
|
|
|
Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
|
|
|
|
|
|
''.bootloader''
|
|
|
Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any
|
|
|
code in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
|
|
|
|
|
|
''.infomem''
|
|
|
Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
|
|
|
this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
|
|
|
|
|
|
''.infomemnobits''
|
|
|
This is the same as the '.infomem' section except that any code in
|
|
|
this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
|
|
|
|
|
|
''.noinit''
|
|
|
Denotes a portion of RAM located above '.bss' section.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The last two sections are used by gcc.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]'
|
|
|
This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text*
|
|
|
sections. The argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is
|
|
|
propagated to the linker using this option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]'
|
|
|
This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
|
|
|
[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument
|
|
|
passed to GCC for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using
|
|
|
this option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--disable-sec-transformation'
|
|
|
Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the
|
|
|
'--code-region' and '--data-region' options. This is useful if you
|
|
|
are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC wrapper,
|
|
|
and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
|
|
|
not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: NDS32, Next: Nios II, Prev: MSP430, Up: Machine Dependent
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.9 'ld' and NDS32
|
|
|
==================
|
|
|
|
|
|
For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The
|
|
|
linker relaxes objects according to these options.
|
|
|
|
|
|
''--m[no-]fp-as-gp''
|
|
|
Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
''--mexport-symbols=FILE''
|
|
|
Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
|
|
|
|
|
|
''--m[no-]ex9''
|
|
|
Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
''--mexport-ex9=FILE''
|
|
|
Export the EX9 table after linking.
|
|
|
|
|
|
''--mimport-ex9=FILE''
|
|
|
Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
''--mupdate-ex9''
|
|
|
Update the existing EX9 table.
|
|
|
|
|
|
''--mex9-limit=NUM''
|
|
|
Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
|
|
|
|
|
|
''--mex9-loop-aware''
|
|
|
Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
|
|
|
|
|
|
''--m[no-]ifc''
|
|
|
Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
|
|
|
|
|
|
''--mifc-loop-aware''
|
|
|
Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Nios II, Next: PowerPC ELF32, Prev: NDS32, Up: Machine Dependent
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.10 'ld' and the Altera Nios II
|
|
|
================================
|
|
|
|
|
|
Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited
|
|
|
to transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
|
|
|
which may result in 'ld' giving 'relocation truncated to fit' errors
|
|
|
with very large programs. The command-line option '--relax' enables the
|
|
|
generation of trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address
|
|
|
space for calls outside the normal 'call' and 'jmpi' address range.
|
|
|
These trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not
|
|
|
themselves be reachable if an input section and its associated call
|
|
|
trampolines are larger than 256MB.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--relax' option is enabled by default unless '-r' is also
|
|
|
specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
|
|
|
'--no-relax' linker option. You can also disable this optimization
|
|
|
locally by using the 'set .noat' directive in assembly-language source
|
|
|
files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the 'at' register as a
|
|
|
temporary.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that the linker '--relax' option is independent of assembler
|
|
|
relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's '-relax-all'
|
|
|
option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction
|
|
|
relaxation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: PowerPC ELF32, Next: PowerPC64 ELF64, Prev: Nios II, Up: Machine Dependent
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.11 'ld' and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
|
|
|
========================================
|
|
|
|
|
|
Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
|
|
|
displacement, which may result in 'ld' giving 'relocation truncated to
|
|
|
fit' errors with very large programs. '--relax' enables the generation
|
|
|
of trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space. These
|
|
|
trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves be
|
|
|
reachable if an input section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine '-r'
|
|
|
and '--relax' to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case both
|
|
|
branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
|
|
|
considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--bss-plt'
|
|
|
Current PowerPC GCC accepts a '-msecure-plt' option that generates
|
|
|
code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has the
|
|
|
security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
|
|
|
writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
|
|
|
'ld' will generate this layout, including stubs to access the PLT,
|
|
|
if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
|
|
|
compiled with '-msecure-plt'. '--bss-plt' forces the old BSS PLT
|
|
|
(and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--secure-plt'
|
|
|
'ld' will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
|
|
|
'-fpic' or '-fPIC' code, but does not do so automatically when
|
|
|
linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
|
|
|
layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the
|
|
|
old style BSS PLT.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--sdata-got'
|
|
|
The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
|
|
|
sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location
|
|
|
of '.plt' must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
|
|
|
section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
|
|
|
'.got' change is more subtle: The new placement allows '.got' to be
|
|
|
read-only in applications linked with '-z relro -z now'. However,
|
|
|
this placement means that '.sdata' cannot always be used in shared
|
|
|
libraries, because the PowerPC ABI accesses '.sdata' in shared
|
|
|
libraries from the GOT pointer. '--sdata-got' forces the old GOT
|
|
|
placement. PowerPC GCC doesn't use '.sdata' in shared libraries,
|
|
|
so this option is really only useful for other compilers that may
|
|
|
do so.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--emit-stub-syms'
|
|
|
This option causes 'ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
|
|
|
that encodes the stub type and destination.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--no-tls-optimize'
|
|
|
PowerPC 'ld' normally performs some optimization of code sequences
|
|
|
used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to disable
|
|
|
the optimization.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: PowerPC64 ELF64, Next: S/390 ELF, Prev: PowerPC ELF32, Up: Machine Dependent
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.12 'ld' and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
|
|
|
==========================================
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--stub-group-size'
|
|
|
Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are
|
|
|
placed by 'ld' in stub sections located between groups of input
|
|
|
sections. '--stub-group-size' specifies the maximum size of a
|
|
|
group of input sections handled by one stub section. Since branch
|
|
|
offsets are signed, a stub section may serve two groups of input
|
|
|
sections, one group before the stub section, and one group after
|
|
|
it. However, when using conditional branches that require stubs,
|
|
|
it may be better (for branch prediction) that stub sections only
|
|
|
serve one group of input sections. A negative value for 'N'
|
|
|
chooses this scheme, ensuring that branches to stubs always use a
|
|
|
negative offset. Two special values of 'N' are recognized, '1' and
|
|
|
'-1'. These both instruct 'ld' to automatically size input section
|
|
|
groups for the branch types detected, with the same behaviour
|
|
|
regarding stub placement as other positive or negative values of
|
|
|
'N' respectively.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that '--stub-group-size' does not split input sections. A
|
|
|
single input section larger than the group size specified will of
|
|
|
course create a larger group (of one section). If input sections
|
|
|
are too large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its
|
|
|
stub.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--emit-stub-syms'
|
|
|
This option causes 'ld' to label linker stubs with a local symbol
|
|
|
that encodes the stub type and destination.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--dotsyms'
|
|
|
'--no-dotsyms'
|
|
|
These two options control how 'ld' interprets version patterns in a
|
|
|
version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a function
|
|
|
descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a code
|
|
|
entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot ('.'). To properly
|
|
|
version a function 'foo', the version script thus needs to control
|
|
|
both 'foo' and '.foo'. The option '--dotsyms', on by default,
|
|
|
automatically adds the required dot-prefixed patterns. Use
|
|
|
'--no-dotsyms' to disable this feature.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--save-restore-funcs'
|
|
|
'--no-save-restore-funcs'
|
|
|
These two options control whether PowerPC64 'ld' automatically
|
|
|
provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
|
|
|
'-Os' code. The default is to provide any such referenced function
|
|
|
for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable link.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--no-tls-optimize'
|
|
|
PowerPC64 'ld' normally performs some optimization of code
|
|
|
sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
|
|
|
disable the optimization.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--tls-get-addr-optimize'
|
|
|
'--no-tls-get-addr-optimize'
|
|
|
These options control whether PowerPC64 'ld' uses a special stub to
|
|
|
call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support an
|
|
|
optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
|
|
|
'__tls_get_addr' for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
|
|
|
stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables
|
|
|
this option when glibc advertises the availability of
|
|
|
__tls_get_addr_opt. Forcing this option on when using an older
|
|
|
glibc won't do much besides slow down your applications, but may be
|
|
|
useful if linking an application against an older glibc with the
|
|
|
expectation that it will normally be used on systems having a newer
|
|
|
glibc.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--no-opd-optimize'
|
|
|
PowerPC64 'ld' normally removes '.opd' section entries
|
|
|
corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed
|
|
|
by the action of '--gc-sections' or linker script '/DISCARD/'. Use
|
|
|
this option to disable '.opd' optimization.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--non-overlapping-opd'
|
|
|
Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
|
|
|
'.opd' entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
|
|
|
the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the
|
|
|
next entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--no-toc-optimize'
|
|
|
PowerPC64 'ld' normally removes unused '.toc' section entries.
|
|
|
Such entries are detected by examining relocations that reference
|
|
|
the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section marks
|
|
|
a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section marks
|
|
|
a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
|
|
|
relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
|
|
|
unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
|
|
|
reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
|
|
|
discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
|
|
|
reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if
|
|
|
assembly code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to
|
|
|
disable the optimization.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--no-multi-toc'
|
|
|
If given any toc option besides '-mcmodel=medium' or
|
|
|
'-mcmodel=large', PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
|
|
|
where TOC entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This
|
|
|
limits the total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 'ld' extends this limit
|
|
|
by grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K
|
|
|
for its TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between
|
|
|
inter-group calls. 'ld' does not split apart input sections, so
|
|
|
cannot help if a single input file has a '.toc' section that
|
|
|
exceeds 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with 'ld -r'.
|
|
|
Use this option to turn off this feature.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--no-toc-sort'
|
|
|
By default, 'ld' sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
|
|
|
happens to have a section called '.init' or '.fini' are placed
|
|
|
first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated with
|
|
|
PowerPC64 gcc's '-mcmodel=small', and lastly TOC sections
|
|
|
referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
|
|
|
'-mcmodel=medium' or '-mcmodel=large' options. Doing this results
|
|
|
in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn off
|
|
|
this feature.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--plt-align'
|
|
|
'--no-plt-align'
|
|
|
Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
|
|
|
aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
|
|
|
boundary when using '--plt-align='. A negative value may be
|
|
|
specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
|
|
|
specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of
|
|
|
boundaries if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a
|
|
|
boundary). By default PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte
|
|
|
boundaries.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--plt-static-chain'
|
|
|
'--no-plt-static-chain'
|
|
|
Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
|
|
|
chain pointer (r11). 'ld' defaults to not loading the static chain
|
|
|
since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--plt-thread-safe'
|
|
|
'--no-plt-thread-safe'
|
|
|
With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when
|
|
|
using lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread
|
|
|
and have another thread see the individual plt entry words update
|
|
|
in the wrong order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct
|
|
|
order and using memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some
|
|
|
sort of read barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By
|
|
|
default, 'ld' looks for calls to commonly used functions that
|
|
|
create threads, and if seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use
|
|
|
these options to change the default behaviour.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--plt-localentry'
|
|
|
'--no-localentry'
|
|
|
ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry
|
|
|
point, ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no
|
|
|
requirement on r2 (the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is
|
|
|
unchanged on return. Such an external function can be called via
|
|
|
the PLT without saving r2 or restoring it on return, avoiding a
|
|
|
common load-hit-store for small functions. The optimization is
|
|
|
attractive, with up to 40% reduction in execution time for a small
|
|
|
function, but can result in symbol interposition failures. Also,
|
|
|
minor changes in a shared library, including system libraries, can
|
|
|
cause a function that was localentry:0 to become localentry:8.
|
|
|
This will result in a dynamic loader complaint and failure to run.
|
|
|
The option is experimental, use with care. '--no-plt-localentry'
|
|
|
is the default.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: S/390 ELF, Next: SPU ELF, Prev: PowerPC64 ELF64, Up: Machine Dependent
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.13 'ld' and S/390 ELF Support
|
|
|
===============================
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--s390-pgste'
|
|
|
This option marks the result file with a 'PT_S390_PGSTE' segment.
|
|
|
The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
|
|
|
binaries marked that way.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: SPU ELF, Next: TI COFF, Prev: S/390 ELF, Up: Machine Dependent
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.14 'ld' and SPU ELF Support
|
|
|
=============================
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--plugin'
|
|
|
This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--no-overlays'
|
|
|
Normally, 'ld' recognizes calls to functions within overlay
|
|
|
regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
|
|
|
'ld' also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option turns
|
|
|
off all this special overlay handling.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--emit-stub-syms'
|
|
|
This option causes 'ld' to label overlay stubs with a local symbol
|
|
|
that encodes the stub type and destination.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--extra-overlay-stubs'
|
|
|
This option causes 'ld' to add overlay call stubs on all function
|
|
|
calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added on
|
|
|
calls to non-overlay regions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--local-store=lo:hi'
|
|
|
'ld' usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in the
|
|
|
address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
|
|
|
range. Disable the check entirely with '--local-store=0:0'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--stack-analysis'
|
|
|
SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
|
|
|
unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
|
|
|
under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this
|
|
|
option, 'ld' will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage. 'ld'
|
|
|
does this by examining symbols in code sections to determine the
|
|
|
extents of functions, and looking at function prologues for stack
|
|
|
adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking for
|
|
|
relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched for
|
|
|
the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
|
|
|
find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle
|
|
|
recursion and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
|
|
|
under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage
|
|
|
for dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a
|
|
|
link map is requested, detailed information about each function's
|
|
|
stack usage and calls will be given.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--emit-stack-syms'
|
|
|
This option, if given along with '--stack-analysis' will result in
|
|
|
'ld' emitting stack sizing symbols for each function. These take
|
|
|
the form '__stack_<function_name>' for global functions, and
|
|
|
'__stack_<number>_<function_name>' for static functions.
|
|
|
'<number>' is the section id in hex. The value of such symbols is
|
|
|
the stack requirement for the corresponding function. The symbol
|
|
|
size will be zero, type 'STT_NOTYPE', binding 'STB_LOCAL', and
|
|
|
section 'SHN_ABS'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: TI COFF, Next: WIN32, Prev: SPU ELF, Up: Machine Dependent
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.15 'ld''s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
|
|
|
================================================
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--format' switch allows selection of one of the various TI COFF
|
|
|
versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are also
|
|
|
supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order format;
|
|
|
'ld' will read any version or byte order, but the output header format
|
|
|
depends on the default specified by the specific target.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: WIN32, Next: Xtensa, Prev: TI COFF, Up: Machine Dependent
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.16 'ld' and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
|
|
|
==================================
|
|
|
|
|
|
This section describes some of the win32 specific 'ld' issues. See
|
|
|
*note Command-line Options: Options. for detailed description of the
|
|
|
command-line options mentioned here.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_import libraries_
|
|
|
The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
|
|
|
libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They
|
|
|
are regular static archives and are handled as any other static
|
|
|
archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of 'ld' have specific support
|
|
|
for creating such libraries provided with the '--out-implib'
|
|
|
command-line option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_exporting DLL symbols_
|
|
|
The cygwin/mingw 'ld' has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_using auto-export functionality_
|
|
|
By default 'ld' exports symbols with the auto-export
|
|
|
functionality, which is controlled by the following
|
|
|
command-line options:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* -export-all-symbols [This is the default]
|
|
|
* -exclude-symbols
|
|
|
* -exclude-libs
|
|
|
* -exclude-modules-for-implib
|
|
|
* -version-script
|
|
|
|
|
|
When auto-export is in operation, 'ld' will export all the
|
|
|
non-local (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with
|
|
|
the exception of a few symbols known to belong to the system's
|
|
|
runtime and libraries. As it will often not be desirable to
|
|
|
export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include private
|
|
|
functions that are not part of any public interface, the
|
|
|
command-line options listed above may be used to filter
|
|
|
symbols out from the list for exporting. The '--output-def'
|
|
|
option can be used in order to see the final list of exported
|
|
|
symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If '--export-all-symbols' is not given explicitly on the
|
|
|
command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be
|
|
|
_disabled_ if either of the following are true:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* A DEF file is used.
|
|
|
* Any symbol in any object file was marked with the
|
|
|
__declspec(dllexport) attribute.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_using a DEF file_
|
|
|
Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF
|
|
|
file is an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which
|
|
|
should be exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named
|
|
|
'<dll name>.def' and is added as any other object file to the
|
|
|
linker's command line. The file's name must end in '.def' or
|
|
|
'.DEF'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
|
|
|
|
|
|
Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior,
|
|
|
unless the '--export-all-symbols' option is also used.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called
|
|
|
'xyz.dll':
|
|
|
|
|
|
LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
|
|
|
|
|
|
EXPORTS
|
|
|
foo
|
|
|
bar
|
|
|
_bar = bar
|
|
|
another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
|
|
|
var1 DATA
|
|
|
doo = foo == foo2
|
|
|
eoo DATA == var1
|
|
|
|
|
|
This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and
|
|
|
seven symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol
|
|
|
'_bar' is an alias for the second. The fourth symbol,
|
|
|
'another_foo' is resolved by "forwarding" to another module
|
|
|
and treating it as an alias for 'afoo' exported from the DLL
|
|
|
'abc.dll'. The final symbol 'var1' is declared to be a data
|
|
|
object. The 'doo' symbol in export library is an alias of
|
|
|
'foo', which gets the string name in export table 'foo2'. The
|
|
|
'eoo' symbol is an data export symbol, which gets in export
|
|
|
table the name 'var1'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The optional 'LIBRARY <name>' command indicates the _internal_
|
|
|
name of the output DLL. If '<name>' does not include a suffix,
|
|
|
the default library suffix, '.DLL' is appended.
|
|
|
|
|
|
When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather
|
|
|
than a library, the 'NAME <name>' command should be used
|
|
|
instead of 'LIBRARY'. If '<name>' does not include a suffix,
|
|
|
the default executable suffix, '.EXE' is appended.
|
|
|
|
|
|
With either 'LIBRARY <name>' or 'NAME <name>' the optional
|
|
|
specification 'BASE = <number>' may be used to specify a
|
|
|
non-default base address for the image.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If neither 'LIBRARY <name>' nor 'NAME <name>' is specified, or
|
|
|
they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as
|
|
|
the filename specified on the command line.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The complete specification of an export symbol is:
|
|
|
|
|
|
EXPORTS
|
|
|
( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
|
|
|
| ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
|
|
|
[ @ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
|
|
|
|
|
|
Declares '<name1>' as an exported symbol from the DLL, or
|
|
|
declares '<name1>' as an exported alias for '<name2>'; or
|
|
|
declares '<name1>' as a "forward" alias for the symbol
|
|
|
'<external-name>' in the DLL '<module-name>'. Optionally, the
|
|
|
symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal '<integer>'
|
|
|
alias. The optional '<name3>' is the to be used string in
|
|
|
import/export table for the symbol.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
|
|
|
|
|
|
'NONAME': Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export
|
|
|
table. It will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either
|
|
|
the value specified by the .def specification or, otherwise,
|
|
|
the value assigned by the linker). The symbol name, however,
|
|
|
does remain visible in the import library (if any), unless
|
|
|
'PRIVATE' is also specified.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'DATA': The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a
|
|
|
function. The import lib will export only an indirect
|
|
|
reference to 'foo' as the symbol '_imp__foo' (ie, 'foo' must
|
|
|
be resolved as '*_imp__foo').
|
|
|
|
|
|
'CONSTANT': Like 'DATA', but put the undecorated 'foo' as well
|
|
|
as '_imp__foo' into the import library. Both refer to the
|
|
|
read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not
|
|
|
to the variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user
|
|
|
code fails to add the 'dllimport' attribute and also fails to
|
|
|
explicitly add the extra indirection that the use of the
|
|
|
attribute enforces, the application will behave unexpectedly.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'PRIVATE': Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do
|
|
|
not put it into the static import library used to resolve
|
|
|
imports at link time. The symbol can still be imported using
|
|
|
the 'LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress' API at runtime or by using
|
|
|
the GNU ld extension of linking directly to the DLL without an
|
|
|
import library.
|
|
|
|
|
|
See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full
|
|
|
specification of other DEF file statements
|
|
|
|
|
|
While linking a shared dll, 'ld' is able to create a DEF file
|
|
|
with the '--output-def <file>' command-line option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_Using decorations_
|
|
|
Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the
|
|
|
source code itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol
|
|
|
to be exported is declared as:
|
|
|
|
|
|
__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
|
|
|
__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
|
|
|
|
|
|
All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
|
|
|
any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated
|
|
|
in this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled,
|
|
|
unless the '--export-all-symbols' option is also used.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must
|
|
|
_not_ decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use
|
|
|
dllimport, instead:
|
|
|
|
|
|
__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
|
|
|
__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
|
|
|
|
|
|
This complicates the structure of library header files,
|
|
|
because when included by the library itself the header must
|
|
|
declare the variables and functions as dllexport, but when
|
|
|
included by client code the header must declare them as
|
|
|
dllimport. There are a number of idioms that are typically
|
|
|
used to do this; often client code can omit the __declspec()
|
|
|
declaration completely. See '--enable-auto-import' and
|
|
|
'automatic data imports' for more information.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_automatic data imports_
|
|
|
The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls
|
|
|
only by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let
|
|
|
the compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with
|
|
|
this issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing
|
|
|
Un*x code to these platforms, especially for large c++ libraries
|
|
|
and applications. The auto-import feature, which was initially
|
|
|
provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the decorations to
|
|
|
achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x platforms.
|
|
|
This feature is enabled with the '--enable-auto-import'
|
|
|
command-line option, although it is enabled by default on
|
|
|
cygwin/mingw. The '--enable-auto-import' option itself now serves
|
|
|
mainly to suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when
|
|
|
linked objects trigger the feature's use.
|
|
|
|
|
|
auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
|
|
|
additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
|
|
|
|
|
|
"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
|
|
|
documentation for ld's '--enable-auto-import' for details."
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--enable-auto-import' documentation explains why this error
|
|
|
occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this
|
|
|
difficulty. One of these methods is the _runtime pseudo-relocs_
|
|
|
feature, described below.
|
|
|
|
|
|
For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or
|
|
|
classes), object files typically contain a base address for the
|
|
|
variable and an offset (_addend_) within the variable-to specify a
|
|
|
particular field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately,
|
|
|
the runtime loader used in win32 environments is incapable of
|
|
|
fixing these references at runtime without the additional
|
|
|
information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations. The
|
|
|
standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve
|
|
|
these references.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The '--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' switch allows these references
|
|
|
to be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting
|
|
|
the references themselves (with their non-zero addends) to
|
|
|
specialized code provided by the runtime environment. Recent
|
|
|
versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and compilers provide
|
|
|
this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the support
|
|
|
is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result
|
|
|
will run without error on an older system.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is not the default; it must be
|
|
|
explicitly enabled as needed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_direct linking to a dll_
|
|
|
The cygwin/mingw ports of 'ld' support the direct linking,
|
|
|
including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
|
|
|
libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does
|
|
|
the traditional import library method, especially when linking
|
|
|
large libraries or applications. When 'ld' creates an import lib,
|
|
|
each function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its
|
|
|
own bfd, even though a single bfd could contain many exports. The
|
|
|
overhead involved in storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's
|
|
|
is quite large, and explains the tremendous time, memory, and
|
|
|
storage needed to link against particularly large or complex
|
|
|
libraries when using import libs.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other
|
|
|
than '-L' and '-l', because 'ld' already searches for a number of
|
|
|
names to match each library. All that is needed from the
|
|
|
developer's perspective is an understanding of this search, in
|
|
|
order to force ld to select the dll instead of an import library.
|
|
|
|
|
|
For instance, when ld is called with the argument '-lxxx' it will
|
|
|
attempt to find, in the first directory of its search path,
|
|
|
|
|
|
libxxx.dll.a
|
|
|
xxx.dll.a
|
|
|
libxxx.a
|
|
|
xxx.lib
|
|
|
libxxx.lib
|
|
|
cygxxx.dll (*)
|
|
|
libxxx.dll
|
|
|
xxx.dll
|
|
|
|
|
|
before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
|
|
|
|
|
|
(*) Actually, this is not 'cygxxx.dll' but in fact is
|
|
|
'<prefix>xxx.dll', where '<prefix>' is set by the 'ld' option
|
|
|
'--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>'. In the case of cygwin, the
|
|
|
standard gcc spec file includes '--dll-search-prefix=cyg', so in
|
|
|
effect we actually search for 'cygxxx.dll'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use
|
|
|
other '<prefix>'es, although at present only cygwin makes use of
|
|
|
this feature. It was originally intended to help avoid name
|
|
|
conflicts among dll's built for the various win32/un*x
|
|
|
environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
|
|
|
could coexist on the same machine.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a 'bin' directory for
|
|
|
applications and dll's and a 'lib' directory for the import
|
|
|
libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
|
|
|
|
|
|
bin/
|
|
|
cygxxx.dll
|
|
|
lib/
|
|
|
libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
|
|
|
libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
|
|
|
|
|
|
Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
|
|
|
done two ways:
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. Use the dll directly by adding the 'bin' path to the link line
|
|
|
gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
|
|
|
|
|
|
However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their
|
|
|
names ('cygncurses-5.dll') this will often fail, unless one
|
|
|
specifies '-L../bin -lncurses-5' to include the version. Import
|
|
|
libs are generally not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
|
|
|
|
|
|
2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the 'lib'
|
|
|
directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
|
|
|
should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
|
|
|
making the app/dll.
|
|
|
|
|
|
ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
|
|
|
|
|
|
Then you can link without any make environment changes.
|
|
|
|
|
|
gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
|
|
|
|
|
|
This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the
|
|
|
following is perfectly legal
|
|
|
|
|
|
bin/
|
|
|
cygxxx-5.dll
|
|
|
lib/
|
|
|
libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
|
|
|
|
|
|
Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
|
|
|
even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
|
|
|
'--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs' is used.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might
|
|
|
justifiably wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are
|
|
|
three reasons:
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did
|
|
|
_not_ work with auto-imported data.
|
|
|
|
|
|
2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within
|
|
|
the import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for
|
|
|
indirection symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again,
|
|
|
the import lib for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and
|
|
|
it is not possible to do this without an import lib.
|
|
|
|
|
|
3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This
|
|
|
is critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32
|
|
|
API) in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases
|
|
|
of their stdcall-decorated assembly names.
|
|
|
|
|
|
So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
|
|
|
true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of) a
|
|
|
dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
|
|
|
binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the massive
|
|
|
improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
|
|
|
requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
|
|
|
will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_symbol aliasing_
|
|
|
_adding additional names_
|
|
|
Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional
|
|
|
names. A symbol 'foo' will be exported as 'foo', but it can
|
|
|
also be exported as '_foo' by using special directives in the
|
|
|
DEF file when creating the dll. This will affect also the
|
|
|
optional created import library. Consider the following DEF
|
|
|
file:
|
|
|
|
|
|
LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
|
|
|
|
|
|
EXPORTS
|
|
|
foo
|
|
|
_foo = foo
|
|
|
|
|
|
The line '_foo = foo' maps the symbol 'foo' to '_foo'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in
|
|
|
the source code using the "weak" attribute:
|
|
|
|
|
|
void foo () { /* Do something. */; }
|
|
|
void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
|
|
|
|
|
|
See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and
|
|
|
weak symbols.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_renaming symbols_
|
|
|
Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the
|
|
|
cygwin kernel does this regularly. A symbol '_foo' can be
|
|
|
exported as 'foo' but not as '_foo' by using special
|
|
|
directives in the DEF file. (This will also affect the import
|
|
|
library, if it is created). In the following example:
|
|
|
|
|
|
LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
|
|
|
|
|
|
EXPORTS
|
|
|
_foo = foo
|
|
|
|
|
|
The line '_foo = foo' maps the exported symbol 'foo' to
|
|
|
'_foo'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
|
|
|
unless the '--export-all-symbols' command-line option is used. If,
|
|
|
however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
|
|
|
_all_ desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols that
|
|
|
are not being renamed, and do _not_ use the '--export-all-symbols'
|
|
|
option. If you list only the renamed symbols in the DEF file, and
|
|
|
use '--export-all-symbols' to handle the other symbols, then the
|
|
|
both the new names _and_ the original names for the renamed symbols
|
|
|
will be exported. In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not
|
|
|
renaming them, which is probably not what you wanted.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_weak externals_
|
|
|
The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols
|
|
|
called weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol
|
|
|
is not defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other
|
|
|
symbol. There are three variants of weak externals:
|
|
|
* Definition is searched for in objects and libraries,
|
|
|
historically called lazy externals.
|
|
|
* Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in
|
|
|
libraries. This form is not presently implemented.
|
|
|
* No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
|
|
|
implemented.
|
|
|
As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate
|
|
|
symbol are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the
|
|
|
symbol uses a default value.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_aligned common symbols_
|
|
|
As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify
|
|
|
the desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is
|
|
|
conveyed from the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of
|
|
|
GNU-specific commands carried in the object file's '.drectve'
|
|
|
section, which are recognized by 'ld' and respected when laying out
|
|
|
the common symbols. Native tools will be able to process object
|
|
|
files employing this GNU extension, but will fail to respect the
|
|
|
alignment instructions, and may issue noisy warnings about unknown
|
|
|
linker directives.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Xtensa, Prev: WIN32, Up: Machine Dependent
|
|
|
|
|
|
4.17 'ld' and Xtensa Processors
|
|
|
===============================
|
|
|
|
|
|
The default 'ld' behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
|
|
|
'SECTIONS' commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
|
|
|
specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
|
|
|
keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
|
|
|
example, with the command:
|
|
|
|
|
|
SECTIONS
|
|
|
{
|
|
|
.text : {
|
|
|
*(.literal .text)
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
}
|
|
|
|
|
|
'ld' may interleave some of the '.literal' and '.text' sections from
|
|
|
different object files to ensure that the literal pools are within the
|
|
|
range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid interleaving might place the
|
|
|
'.literal' sections from an initial group of files followed by the
|
|
|
'.text' sections of that group of files. Then, the '.literal' sections
|
|
|
from the rest of the files and the '.text' sections from the rest of the
|
|
|
files would follow.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of 'ld' and
|
|
|
provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
|
|
|
is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
|
|
|
literal will be removed and all the 'L32R' instructions that use it will
|
|
|
be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the location of
|
|
|
the replacement literal is within the offset range of all the 'L32R'
|
|
|
instructions. The second optimization is to remove unnecessary overhead
|
|
|
from assembler-generated "longcall" sequences of 'L32R'/'CALLXN' when
|
|
|
the target functions are within range of direct 'CALLN' instructions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be
|
|
|
optimized to a direct call, the linker will change the 'CALLXN'
|
|
|
instruction to a 'CALLN' instruction, remove the 'L32R' instruction, and
|
|
|
remove the literal referenced by the 'L32R' instruction if it is not
|
|
|
used for anything else. Removing the 'L32R' instruction always reduces
|
|
|
code size but can potentially hurt performance by changing the alignment
|
|
|
of subsequent branch targets. By default, the linker will always
|
|
|
preserve alignments, either by switching some instructions between
|
|
|
24-bit encodings and the equivalent density instructions or by inserting
|
|
|
a no-op in place of the 'L32R' instruction that was removed. If code
|
|
|
size is more important than performance, the '--size-opt' option can be
|
|
|
used to prevent the linker from widening density instructions or
|
|
|
inserting no-ops, except in a few cases where no-ops are required for
|
|
|
correctness.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
|
|
|
control the linker:
|
|
|
|
|
|
'--size-opt'
|
|
|
When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code
|
|
|
size more than performance. With this option, the linker will not
|
|
|
insert no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch
|
|
|
target alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are
|
|
|
required to preserve the correctness of the code.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: BFD, Next: Reporting Bugs, Prev: Machine Dependent, Up: Top
|
|
|
|
|
|
5 BFD
|
|
|
*****
|
|
|
|
|
|
The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
|
|
|
These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
|
|
|
object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
|
|
|
format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
|
|
|
it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
|
|
|
associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
|
|
|
object file formats available. You can use 'objdump -i' (*note objdump:
|
|
|
(binutils.info)objdump.) to list all the formats available for your
|
|
|
configuration.
|
|
|
|
|
|
As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between several
|
|
|
conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing BFD design was
|
|
|
efficiency: any time used converting between formats is time which would
|
|
|
not have been spent had BFD not been involved. This is partly offset by
|
|
|
abstraction payback; since BFD simplifies applications and back ends,
|
|
|
more time and care may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater
|
|
|
speed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in mind
|
|
|
is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
|
|
|
useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
|
|
|
conversion and during output. *Note BFD information loss::.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Menu:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: BFD outline, Up: BFD
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.1 How It Works: An Outline of BFD
|
|
|
===================================
|
|
|
|
|
|
When an object file is opened, BFD subroutines automatically determine
|
|
|
the format of the input object file. They then build a descriptor in
|
|
|
memory with pointers to routines that will be used to access elements of
|
|
|
the object file's data structures.
|
|
|
|
|
|
As different information from the object files is required, BFD reads
|
|
|
from different sections of the file and processes them. For example, a
|
|
|
very common operation for the linker is processing symbol tables. Each
|
|
|
BFD back end provides a routine for converting between the object file's
|
|
|
representation of symbols and an internal canonical format. When the
|
|
|
linker asks for the symbol table of an object file, it calls through a
|
|
|
memory pointer to the routine from the relevant BFD back end which reads
|
|
|
and converts the table into a canonical form. The linker then operates
|
|
|
upon the canonical form. When the link is finished and the linker
|
|
|
writes the output file's symbol table, another BFD back end routine is
|
|
|
called to take the newly created symbol table and convert it into the
|
|
|
chosen output format.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Menu:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* BFD information loss:: Information Loss
|
|
|
* Canonical format:: The BFD canonical object-file format
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: BFD information loss, Next: Canonical format, Up: BFD outline
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.1.1 Information Loss
|
|
|
----------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
_Information can be lost during output._ The output formats supported
|
|
|
by BFD do not provide identical facilities, and information which can be
|
|
|
described in one form has nowhere to go in another format. One example
|
|
|
of this is alignment information in 'b.out'. There is nowhere in an
|
|
|
'a.out' format file to store alignment information on the contained
|
|
|
data, so when a file is linked from 'b.out' and an 'a.out' image is
|
|
|
produced, alignment information will not propagate to the output file.
|
|
|
(The linker will still use the alignment information internally, so the
|
|
|
link is performed correctly).
|
|
|
|
|
|
Another example is COFF section names. COFF files may contain an
|
|
|
unlimited number of sections, each one with a textual section name. If
|
|
|
the target of the link is a format which does not have many sections
|
|
|
(e.g., 'a.out') or has sections without names (e.g., the Oasys format),
|
|
|
the link cannot be done simply. You can circumvent this problem by
|
|
|
describing the desired input-to-output section mapping with the linker
|
|
|
command language.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_Information can be lost during canonicalization._ The BFD internal
|
|
|
canonical form of the external formats is not exhaustive; there are
|
|
|
structures in input formats for which there is no direct representation
|
|
|
internally. This means that the BFD back ends cannot maintain all
|
|
|
possible data richness through the transformation between external to
|
|
|
internal and back to external formats.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This limitation is only a problem when an application reads one
|
|
|
format and writes another. Each BFD back end is responsible for
|
|
|
maintaining as much data as possible, and the internal BFD canonical
|
|
|
form has structures which are opaque to the BFD core, and exported only
|
|
|
to the back ends. When a file is read in one format, the canonical form
|
|
|
is generated for BFD and the application. At the same time, the back
|
|
|
end saves away any information which may otherwise be lost. If the data
|
|
|
is then written back in the same format, the back end routine will be
|
|
|
able to use the canonical form provided by the BFD core as well as the
|
|
|
information it prepared earlier. Since there is a great deal of
|
|
|
commonality between back ends, there is no information lost when linking
|
|
|
or copying big endian COFF to little endian COFF, or 'a.out' to 'b.out'.
|
|
|
When a mixture of formats is linked, the information is only lost from
|
|
|
the files whose format differs from the destination.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Canonical format, Prev: BFD information loss, Up: BFD outline
|
|
|
|
|
|
5.1.2 The BFD canonical object-file format
|
|
|
------------------------------------------
|
|
|
|
|
|
The greatest potential for loss of information occurs when there is the
|
|
|
least overlap between the information provided by the source format,
|
|
|
that stored by the canonical format, and that needed by the destination
|
|
|
format. A brief description of the canonical form may help you
|
|
|
understand which kinds of data you can count on preserving across
|
|
|
conversions.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_files_
|
|
|
Information stored on a per-file basis includes target machine
|
|
|
architecture, particular implementation format type, a demand
|
|
|
pageable bit, and a write protected bit. Information like Unix
|
|
|
magic numbers is not stored here--only the magic numbers' meaning,
|
|
|
so a 'ZMAGIC' file would have both the demand pageable bit and the
|
|
|
write protected text bit set. The byte order of the target is
|
|
|
stored on a per-file basis, so that big- and little-endian object
|
|
|
files may be used with one another.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_sections_
|
|
|
Each section in the input file contains the name of the section,
|
|
|
the section's original address in the object file, size and
|
|
|
alignment information, various flags, and pointers into other BFD
|
|
|
data structures.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_symbols_
|
|
|
Each symbol contains a pointer to the information for the object
|
|
|
file which originally defined it, its name, its value, and various
|
|
|
flag bits. When a BFD back end reads in a symbol table, it
|
|
|
relocates all symbols to make them relative to the base of the
|
|
|
section where they were defined. Doing this ensures that each
|
|
|
symbol points to its containing section. Each symbol also has a
|
|
|
varying amount of hidden private data for the BFD back end. Since
|
|
|
the symbol points to the original file, the private data format for
|
|
|
that symbol is accessible. 'ld' can operate on a collection of
|
|
|
symbols of wildly different formats without problems.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Normal global and simple local symbols are maintained on output, so
|
|
|
an output file (no matter its format) will retain symbols pointing
|
|
|
to functions and to global, static, and common variables. Some
|
|
|
symbol information is not worth retaining; in 'a.out', type
|
|
|
information is stored in the symbol table as long symbol names.
|
|
|
This information would be useless to most COFF debuggers; the
|
|
|
linker has command-line switches to allow users to throw it away.
|
|
|
|
|
|
There is one word of type information within the symbol, so if the
|
|
|
format supports symbol type information within symbols (for
|
|
|
example, COFF, Oasys) and the type is simple enough to fit within
|
|
|
one word (nearly everything but aggregates), the information will
|
|
|
be preserved.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_relocation level_
|
|
|
Each canonical BFD relocation record contains a pointer to the
|
|
|
symbol to relocate to, the offset of the data to relocate, the
|
|
|
section the data is in, and a pointer to a relocation type
|
|
|
descriptor. Relocation is performed by passing messages through
|
|
|
the relocation type descriptor and the symbol pointer. Therefore,
|
|
|
relocations can be performed on output data using a relocation
|
|
|
method that is only available in one of the input formats. For
|
|
|
instance, Oasys provides a byte relocation format. A relocation
|
|
|
record requesting this relocation type would point indirectly to a
|
|
|
routine to perform this, so the relocation may be performed on a
|
|
|
byte being written to a 68k COFF file, even though 68k COFF has no
|
|
|
such relocation type.
|
|
|
|
|
|
_line numbers_
|
|
|
Object formats can contain, for debugging purposes, some form of
|
|
|
mapping between symbols, source line numbers, and addresses in the
|
|
|
output file. These addresses have to be relocated along with the
|
|
|
symbol information. Each symbol with an associated list of line
|
|
|
number records points to the first record of the list. The head of
|
|
|
a line number list consists of a pointer to the symbol, which
|
|
|
allows finding out the address of the function whose line number is
|
|
|
being described. The rest of the list is made up of pairs: offsets
|
|
|
into the section and line numbers. Any format which can simply
|
|
|
derive this information can pass it successfully between formats.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Reporting Bugs, Next: MRI, Prev: BFD, Up: Top
|
|
|
|
|
|
6 Reporting Bugs
|
|
|
****************
|
|
|
|
|
|
Your bug reports play an essential role in making 'ld' reliable.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem,
|
|
|
or it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report
|
|
|
is to help the entire community by making the next version of 'ld' work
|
|
|
better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of 'ld'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
|
|
|
information that enables us to fix the bug.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Menu:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
|
|
|
* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Bug Criteria, Next: Bug Reporting, Up: Reporting Bugs
|
|
|
|
|
|
6.1 Have You Found a Bug?
|
|
|
=========================
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some
|
|
|
guidelines:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is
|
|
|
a 'ld' bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* If 'ld' produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* If 'ld' does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
|
|
|
may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
|
|
|
object files are correct.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
|
|
|
improvement of 'ld' are welcome in any case.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: Bug Reporting, Prev: Bug Criteria, Up: Reporting Bugs
|
|
|
|
|
|
6.2 How to Report Bugs
|
|
|
======================
|
|
|
|
|
|
A number of companies and individuals offer support for GNU products.
|
|
|
If you obtained 'ld' from a support organization, we recommend you
|
|
|
contact that organization first.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can find contact information for many support companies and
|
|
|
individuals in the file 'etc/SERVICE' in the GNU Emacs distribution.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Otherwise, send bug reports for 'ld' to
|
|
|
<http://www.sourceware.org/bugzilla/>.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this: *report
|
|
|
all the facts*. If you are not sure whether to state a fact or leave it
|
|
|
out, state it!
|
|
|
|
|
|
Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
|
|
|
problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
|
|
|
assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.
|
|
|
Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is
|
|
|
a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the location where
|
|
|
that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name were different, the
|
|
|
contents of that location would fool the linker into doing the right
|
|
|
thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a specific, complete
|
|
|
example. That is the easiest thing for you to do, and the most helpful.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
|
|
|
the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on
|
|
|
the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, "Does this ring a
|
|
|
bell?" This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
|
|
|
respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate. You
|
|
|
might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
|
|
|
|
|
|
To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* The version of 'ld'. 'ld' announces it if you start it with the
|
|
|
'--version' argument.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in
|
|
|
looking for the bug in the current version of 'ld'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* Any patches you may have applied to the 'ld' source, including any
|
|
|
patches made to the 'BFD' library.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name
|
|
|
and version number.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* What compiler (and its version) was used to compile 'ld'--e.g.
|
|
|
"'gcc-2.7'".
|
|
|
|
|
|
* The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
|
|
|
observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something
|
|
|
important, list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output
|
|
|
from make) is sufficient.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess
|
|
|
wrong and then we might not encounter the bug.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce
|
|
|
the bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object
|
|
|
files provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than
|
|
|
10K. For bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or
|
|
|
HTTP or else state that you are willing to send the object file(s)
|
|
|
to whomever requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a
|
|
|
mailing list, so we do not want to clog it up with large
|
|
|
attachments). But small attachments are best.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the source files were assembled using 'gas' or compiled using
|
|
|
'gcc', then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
|
|
|
object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
|
|
|
'gas' or 'gcc' was used to produce the object files. Also say how
|
|
|
'gas' or 'gcc' were configured.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
|
|
|
incorrect. For example, "It gets a fatal signal."
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of course, if the bug is that 'ld' gets a fatal signal, then we
|
|
|
will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we
|
|
|
might not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well
|
|
|
not give us a chance to make a mistake.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should
|
|
|
still say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on,
|
|
|
such as, your copy of 'ld' is out of sync, or you have encountered
|
|
|
a bug in the C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your
|
|
|
copy might crash and ours would not. If you told us to expect a
|
|
|
crash, then when ours fails to crash, we would know that the bug
|
|
|
was not happening for us. If you had not told us to expect a
|
|
|
crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
|
|
|
observations.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* If you wish to suggest changes to the 'ld' source, send us context
|
|
|
diffs, as generated by 'diff' with the '-u', '-c', or '-p' option.
|
|
|
Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
|
|
|
discuss something in the 'ld' source, refer to it by context, not
|
|
|
by line number.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in
|
|
|
your sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information
|
|
|
to us.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Here are some things that are not necessary:
|
|
|
|
|
|
* A description of the envelope of the bug.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
|
|
|
which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
|
|
|
changes will not affect it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way
|
|
|
we will find the bug is by running a single example under the
|
|
|
debugger with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of
|
|
|
examples. We recommend that you save your time for something else.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report _instead_ of
|
|
|
the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
|
|
|
output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
|
|
|
less time, and so on.
|
|
|
|
|
|
However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do
|
|
|
this, report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you
|
|
|
used.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* A patch for the bug.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not
|
|
|
omit the necessary information, such as the test case, on the
|
|
|
assumption that a patch is all we need. We might see problems with
|
|
|
your patch and decide to fix the problem another way, or we might
|
|
|
not understand it at all.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Sometimes with a program as complicated as 'ld' it is very hard to
|
|
|
construct an example that will make the program follow a certain
|
|
|
path through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will
|
|
|
not be able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that
|
|
|
the bug is fixed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why
|
|
|
your patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A
|
|
|
test case will help us to understand.
|
|
|
|
|
|
* A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about
|
|
|
such things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: MRI, Next: GNU Free Documentation License, Prev: Reporting Bugs, Up: Top
|
|
|
|
|
|
Appendix A MRI Compatible Script Files
|
|
|
**************************************
|
|
|
|
|
|
To aid users making the transition to GNU 'ld' from the MRI linker, 'ld'
|
|
|
can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an alternative to the more
|
|
|
general-purpose linker scripting language described in *note Scripts::.
|
|
|
MRI compatible linker scripts have a much simpler command set than the
|
|
|
scripting language otherwise used with 'ld'. GNU 'ld' supports the most
|
|
|
commonly used MRI linker commands; these commands are described here.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the 'a.out' object
|
|
|
file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
|
|
|
features to make use of them.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
|
|
|
'-c' command-line option.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
|
|
|
command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
|
|
|
blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
|
|
|
MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, 'ld' issues a
|
|
|
warning message, but continues processing the script.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Lines beginning with '*' are comments.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
|
|
|
lower case; for example, 'chip' is the same as 'CHIP'. The following
|
|
|
list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'ABSOLUTE SECNAME'
|
|
|
'ABSOLUTE SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
|
|
|
Normally, 'ld' includes in the output file all sections from all
|
|
|
the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use
|
|
|
the 'ABSOLUTE' command to restrict the sections that will be
|
|
|
present in your output program. If the 'ABSOLUTE' command is used
|
|
|
at all in a script, then only the sections named explicitly in
|
|
|
'ABSOLUTE' commands will appear in the linker output. You can
|
|
|
still use other input sections (whatever you select on the command
|
|
|
line, or using 'LOAD') to resolve addresses in the output file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'ALIAS OUT-SECNAME, IN-SECNAME'
|
|
|
Use this command to place the data from input section IN-SECNAME in
|
|
|
a section called OUT-SECNAME in the linker output file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
IN-SECNAME may be an integer.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'ALIGN SECNAME = EXPRESSION'
|
|
|
Align the section called SECNAME to EXPRESSION. The EXPRESSION
|
|
|
should be a power of two.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'BASE EXPRESSION'
|
|
|
Use the value of EXPRESSION as the lowest address (other than
|
|
|
absolute addresses) in the output file.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'CHIP EXPRESSION'
|
|
|
'CHIP EXPRESSION, EXPRESSION'
|
|
|
This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'END'
|
|
|
This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for
|
|
|
compatibility.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'FORMAT OUTPUT-FORMAT'
|
|
|
Similar to the 'OUTPUT_FORMAT' command in the more general linker
|
|
|
language, but restricted to S-records, if OUTPUT-FORMAT is 'S'
|
|
|
|
|
|
'LIST ANYTHING...'
|
|
|
Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
|
|
|
'ld' command-line option '-M'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The keyword 'LIST' may be followed by anything on the same line,
|
|
|
with no change in its effect.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'LOAD FILENAME'
|
|
|
'LOAD FILENAME, FILENAME, ... FILENAME'
|
|
|
Include one or more object file FILENAME in the link; this has the
|
|
|
same effect as specifying FILENAME directly on the 'ld' command
|
|
|
line.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'NAME OUTPUT-NAME'
|
|
|
OUTPUT-NAME is the name for the program produced by 'ld'; the
|
|
|
MRI-compatible command 'NAME' is equivalent to the command-line
|
|
|
option '-o' or the general script language command 'OUTPUT'.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'ORDER SECNAME, SECNAME, ... SECNAME'
|
|
|
'ORDER SECNAME SECNAME SECNAME'
|
|
|
Normally, 'ld' orders the sections in its output file in the order
|
|
|
in which they first appear in the input files. In an
|
|
|
MRI-compatible script, you can override this ordering with the
|
|
|
'ORDER' command. The sections you list with 'ORDER' will appear
|
|
|
first in your output file, in the order specified.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'PUBLIC NAME=EXPRESSION'
|
|
|
'PUBLIC NAME,EXPRESSION'
|
|
|
'PUBLIC NAME EXPRESSION'
|
|
|
Supply a value (EXPRESSION) for external symbol NAME used in the
|
|
|
linker input files.
|
|
|
|
|
|
'SECT SECNAME, EXPRESSION'
|
|
|
'SECT SECNAME=EXPRESSION'
|
|
|
'SECT SECNAME EXPRESSION'
|
|
|
You can use any of these three forms of the 'SECT' command to
|
|
|
specify the start address (EXPRESSION) for section SECNAME. If you
|
|
|
have more than one 'SECT' statement for the same SECNAME, only the
|
|
|
_first_ sets the start address.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: GNU Free Documentation License, Next: LD Index, Prev: MRI, Up: Top
|
|
|
|
|
|
Appendix B GNU Free Documentation License
|
|
|
*****************************************
|
|
|
|
|
|
Version 1.3, 3 November 2008
|
|
|
|
|
|
Copyright (C) 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
|
|
<http://fsf.org/>
|
|
|
|
|
|
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
|
|
|
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
|
|
|
|
|
|
0. PREAMBLE
|
|
|
|
|
|
The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
|
|
|
functional and useful document "free" in the sense of freedom: to
|
|
|
assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
|
|
|
with or without modifying it, either commercially or
|
|
|
noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the
|
|
|
author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not
|
|
|
being considered responsible for modifications made by others.
|
|
|
|
|
|
This License is a kind of "copyleft", which means that derivative
|
|
|
works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.
|
|
|
It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
|
|
|
license designed for free software.
|
|
|
|
|
|
We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for
|
|
|
free software, because free software needs free documentation: a
|
|
|
free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms
|
|
|
that the software does. But this License is not limited to
|
|
|
software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless
|
|
|
of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We
|
|
|
recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is
|
|
|
instruction or reference.
|
|
|
|
|
|
1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
|
|
|
|
|
|
This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium,
|
|
|
that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can
|
|
|
be distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice
|
|
|
grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration,
|
|
|
to use that work under the conditions stated herein. The
|
|
|
"Document", below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member
|
|
|
of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as "you". You accept
|
|
|
the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a way
|
|
|
requiring permission under copyright law.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A "Modified Version" of the Document means any work containing the
|
|
|
Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
|
|
|
modifications and/or translated into another language.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A "Secondary Section" is a named appendix or a front-matter section
|
|
|
of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
|
|
|
publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall
|
|
|
subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could
|
|
|
fall directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document
|
|
|
is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not
|
|
|
explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of
|
|
|
historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or
|
|
|
of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position
|
|
|
regarding them.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The "Invariant Sections" are certain Secondary Sections whose
|
|
|
titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the
|
|
|
notice that says that the Document is released under this License.
|
|
|
If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it
|
|
|
is not allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may
|
|
|
contain zero Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify
|
|
|
any Invariant Sections then there are none.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The "Cover Texts" are certain short passages of text that are
|
|
|
listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice
|
|
|
that says that the Document is released under this License. A
|
|
|
Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may
|
|
|
be at most 25 words.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A "Transparent" copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
|
|
|
represented in a format whose specification is available to the
|
|
|
general public, that is suitable for revising the document
|
|
|
straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed
|
|
|
of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely
|
|
|
available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text
|
|
|
formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats
|
|
|
suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise
|
|
|
Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of markup, has
|
|
|
been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by
|
|
|
readers is not Transparent. An image format is not Transparent if
|
|
|
used for any substantial amount of text. A copy that is not
|
|
|
"Transparent" is called "Opaque".
|
|
|
|
|
|
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
|
|
|
ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format,
|
|
|
SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming
|
|
|
simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification.
|
|
|
Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG.
|
|
|
Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and
|
|
|
edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which
|
|
|
the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and
|
|
|
the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word
|
|
|
processors for output purposes only.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The "Title Page" means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
|
|
|
plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the
|
|
|
material this License requires to appear in the title page. For
|
|
|
works in formats which do not have any title page as such, "Title
|
|
|
Page" means the text near the most prominent appearance of the
|
|
|
work's title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The "publisher" means any person or entity that distributes copies
|
|
|
of the Document to the public.
|
|
|
|
|
|
A section "Entitled XYZ" means a named subunit of the Document
|
|
|
whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses
|
|
|
following text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ
|
|
|
stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as
|
|
|
"Acknowledgements", "Dedications", "Endorsements", or "History".)
|
|
|
To "Preserve the Title" of such a section when you modify the
|
|
|
Document means that it remains a section "Entitled XYZ" according
|
|
|
to this definition.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice
|
|
|
which states that this License applies to the Document. These
|
|
|
Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in
|
|
|
this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
|
|
|
implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and
|
|
|
has no effect on the meaning of this License.
|
|
|
|
|
|
2. VERBATIM COPYING
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
|
|
|
commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
|
|
|
copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License
|
|
|
applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you
|
|
|
add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You
|
|
|
may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading
|
|
|
or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However,
|
|
|
you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you
|
|
|
distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the
|
|
|
conditions in section 3.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above,
|
|
|
and you may publicly display copies.
|
|
|
|
|
|
3. COPYING IN QUANTITY
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly
|
|
|
have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and
|
|
|
the Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must
|
|
|
enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all
|
|
|
these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and
|
|
|
Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly
|
|
|
and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The
|
|
|
front cover must present the full title with all words of the title
|
|
|
equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the
|
|
|
covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as
|
|
|
long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these
|
|
|
conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
|
|
|
legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
|
|
|
reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto
|
|
|
adjacent pages.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document
|
|
|
numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable
|
|
|
Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with
|
|
|
each Opaque copy a computer-network location from which the general
|
|
|
network-using public has access to download using public-standard
|
|
|
network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free
|
|
|
of added material. If you use the latter option, you must take
|
|
|
reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque
|
|
|
copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will
|
|
|
remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one
|
|
|
year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or
|
|
|
through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.
|
|
|
|
|
|
It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of
|
|
|
the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies,
|
|
|
to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the
|
|
|
Document.
|
|
|
|
|
|
4. MODIFICATIONS
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document
|
|
|
under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you
|
|
|
release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the
|
|
|
Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing
|
|
|
distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever
|
|
|
possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in
|
|
|
the Modified Version:
|
|
|
|
|
|
A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title
|
|
|
distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous
|
|
|
versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the
|
|
|
History section of the Document). You may use the same title
|
|
|
as a previous version if the original publisher of that
|
|
|
version gives permission.
|
|
|
|
|
|
B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or
|
|
|
entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in
|
|
|
the Modified Version, together with at least five of the
|
|
|
principal authors of the Document (all of its principal
|
|
|
authors, if it has fewer than five), unless they release you
|
|
|
from this requirement.
|
|
|
|
|
|
C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
|
|
|
Modified Version, as the publisher.
|
|
|
|
|
|
D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
|
|
|
|
|
|
E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
|
|
|
adjacent to the other copyright notices.
|
|
|
|
|
|
F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license
|
|
|
notice giving the public permission to use the Modified
|
|
|
Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in
|
|
|
the Addendum below.
|
|
|
|
|
|
G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant
|
|
|
Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document's
|
|
|
license notice.
|
|
|
|
|
|
H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
|
|
|
|
|
|
I. Preserve the section Entitled "History", Preserve its Title,
|
|
|
and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new
|
|
|
authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the
|
|
|
Title Page. If there is no section Entitled "History" in the
|
|
|
Document, create one stating the title, year, authors, and
|
|
|
publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add
|
|
|
an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the
|
|
|
previous sentence.
|
|
|
|
|
|
J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document
|
|
|
for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and
|
|
|
likewise the network locations given in the Document for
|
|
|
previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the
|
|
|
"History" section. You may omit a network location for a work
|
|
|
that was published at least four years before the Document
|
|
|
itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers
|
|
|
to gives permission.
|
|
|
|
|
|
K. For any section Entitled "Acknowledgements" or "Dedications",
|
|
|
Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section
|
|
|
all the substance and tone of each of the contributor
|
|
|
acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.
|
|
|
|
|
|
L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered
|
|
|
in their text and in their titles. Section numbers or the
|
|
|
equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
|
|
|
|
|
|
M. Delete any section Entitled "Endorsements". Such a section
|
|
|
may not be included in the Modified Version.
|
|
|
|
|
|
N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled
|
|
|
"Endorsements" or to conflict in title with any Invariant
|
|
|
Section.
|
|
|
|
|
|
O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
|
|
|
appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no
|
|
|
material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate
|
|
|
some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their
|
|
|
titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's
|
|
|
license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other
|
|
|
section titles.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may add a section Entitled "Endorsements", provided it contains
|
|
|
nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
|
|
|
parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text
|
|
|
has been approved by an organization as the authoritative
|
|
|
definition of a standard.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
|
|
|
and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of
|
|
|
the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage
|
|
|
of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
|
|
|
through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document
|
|
|
already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added
|
|
|
by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on
|
|
|
behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old
|
|
|
one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added
|
|
|
the old one.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this
|
|
|
License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to
|
|
|
assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
|
|
|
|
|
|
5. COMBINING DOCUMENTS
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may combine the Document with other documents released under
|
|
|
this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for
|
|
|
modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all
|
|
|
of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents,
|
|
|
unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your
|
|
|
combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all
|
|
|
their Warranty Disclaimers.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
|
|
|
multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
|
|
|
copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
|
|
|
but different contents, make the title of each such section unique
|
|
|
by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the
|
|
|
original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a
|
|
|
unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in
|
|
|
the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the
|
|
|
combined work.
|
|
|
|
|
|
In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled
|
|
|
"History" in the various original documents, forming one section
|
|
|
Entitled "History"; likewise combine any sections Entitled
|
|
|
"Acknowledgements", and any sections Entitled "Dedications". You
|
|
|
must delete all sections Entitled "Endorsements."
|
|
|
|
|
|
6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other
|
|
|
documents released under this License, and replace the individual
|
|
|
copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy
|
|
|
that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the
|
|
|
rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents
|
|
|
in all other respects.
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may extract a single document from such a collection, and
|
|
|
distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert
|
|
|
a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this
|
|
|
License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that
|
|
|
document.
|
|
|
|
|
|
7. AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
|
|
|
|
|
|
A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other
|
|
|
separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a
|
|
|
storage or distribution medium, is called an "aggregate" if the
|
|
|
copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the
|
|
|
legal rights of the compilation's users beyond what the individual
|
|
|
works permit. When the Document is included in an aggregate, this
|
|
|
License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which
|
|
|
are not themselves derivative works of the Document.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
|
|
|
copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half
|
|
|
of the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed
|
|
|
on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
|
|
|
electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic
|
|
|
form. Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket
|
|
|
the whole aggregate.
|
|
|
|
|
|
8. TRANSLATION
|
|
|
|
|
|
Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
|
|
|
distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section
|
|
|
4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
|
|
|
permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
|
|
|
translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
|
|
|
original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a
|
|
|
translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
|
|
|
Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also
|
|
|
include the original English version of this License and the
|
|
|
original versions of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a
|
|
|
disagreement between the translation and the original version of
|
|
|
this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will
|
|
|
prevail.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If a section in the Document is Entitled "Acknowledgements",
|
|
|
"Dedications", or "History", the requirement (section 4) to
|
|
|
Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the
|
|
|
actual title.
|
|
|
|
|
|
9. TERMINATION
|
|
|
|
|
|
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
|
|
|
except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt
|
|
|
otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void,
|
|
|
and will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
|
|
|
|
|
|
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
|
|
|
license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
|
|
|
provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and
|
|
|
finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the
|
|
|
copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some
|
|
|
reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
|
|
|
reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
|
|
|
violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
|
|
|
received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from
|
|
|
that copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days
|
|
|
after your receipt of the notice.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate
|
|
|
the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you
|
|
|
under this License. If your rights have been terminated and not
|
|
|
permanently reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the
|
|
|
same material does not give you any rights to use it.
|
|
|
|
|
|
10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
|
|
|
|
|
|
The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of
|
|
|
the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new
|
|
|
versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
|
|
|
differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See
|
|
|
<http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/>.
|
|
|
|
|
|
Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version
|
|
|
number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered
|
|
|
version of this License "or any later version" applies to it, you
|
|
|
have the option of following the terms and conditions either of
|
|
|
that specified version or of any later version that has been
|
|
|
published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the
|
|
|
Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may
|
|
|
choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free
|
|
|
Software Foundation. If the Document specifies that a proxy can
|
|
|
decide which future versions of this License can be used, that
|
|
|
proxy's public statement of acceptance of a version permanently
|
|
|
authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.
|
|
|
|
|
|
11. RELICENSING
|
|
|
|
|
|
"Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site" (or "MMC Site") means any
|
|
|
World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also
|
|
|
provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works. A
|
|
|
public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server.
|
|
|
A "Massive Multiauthor Collaboration" (or "MMC") contained in the
|
|
|
site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC
|
|
|
site.
|
|
|
|
|
|
"CC-BY-SA" means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0
|
|
|
license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit
|
|
|
corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco,
|
|
|
California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license
|
|
|
published by that same organization.
|
|
|
|
|
|
"Incorporate" means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or
|
|
|
in part, as part of another Document.
|
|
|
|
|
|
An MMC is "eligible for relicensing" if it is licensed under this
|
|
|
License, and if all works that were first published under this
|
|
|
License somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently
|
|
|
incorporated in whole or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover
|
|
|
texts or invariant sections, and (2) were thus incorporated prior
|
|
|
to November 1, 2008.
|
|
|
|
|
|
The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the
|
|
|
site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1,
|
|
|
2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.
|
|
|
|
|
|
ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
|
|
|
====================================================
|
|
|
|
|
|
To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
|
|
|
the License in the document and put the following copyright and license
|
|
|
notices just after the title page:
|
|
|
|
|
|
Copyright (C) YEAR YOUR NAME.
|
|
|
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
|
|
|
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
|
|
|
or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
|
|
|
with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover
|
|
|
Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
|
|
|
Free Documentation License''.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover
|
|
|
Texts, replace the "with...Texts." line with this:
|
|
|
|
|
|
with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with
|
|
|
the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts
|
|
|
being LIST.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
|
|
|
combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
|
|
|
situation.
|
|
|
|
|
|
If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
|
|
|
recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free
|
|
|
software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit
|
|
|
their use in free software.
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
File: ld.info, Node: LD Index, Prev: GNU Free Documentation License, Up: Top
|
|
|
|
|
|
LD Index
|
|
|
********
|
|
|
|
|
|
|